66

2018 STATEMENTS OF FACT

MINE RESCUE

1. To test for methane, use a methane detector or chemical analysis.

2. Carbon monoxide can be detected by means of carbon monoxide detectors, multi- gas detectors, or by chemical analysis.

3. Nitrogen dioxide is produced by burning and by the detonation of explosives.

4. A mixture of coal dust in air reduces the explosive limit of methane. 5. One and one-half to two percent methane together with coal dust in air may be

explosive. 6. Mines below the water table tend to have more methane than those above the

water table. 7. After a fire or explosion in a mine, rescue teams are usually needed to go into the

mine to assess and re-establish ventilation.

8. The range of concentrations within which a gas will explode are known as its “explosive range”.

9. Any flammable gas can explode under certain conditions. 10. Indirect firefighting methods allow firefighters to remain a safe distance from the

fire. 11. Temporary seals are built before permanent seals are erected in order to seal off a

fire area as quickly as possible.

12. In mines where head coal (roof coal) is left, a fire will spread more rapidly. 13. One hazard of heat during a fire is that it tends to weaken the roof, especially

where head coal is left. 14. Fires can be attacked by the use of a foam generator from a distance of 500-1,500

feet.

15. It is generally recommended that teams not travel through foam filled areas. 16. One method of indirect firefighting is flooding the sealed fire area with water.

67

17. Once an explosion has occurred, there is always the possibility of further explosions.

18. Mine rescue teams may find it necessary to use line brattice to sweep noxious or

explosive gases from a face area. 19. Once ventilation has been re-established and fresh air advanced, non-apparatus

crews can take over the rehabilitation and cleanup effort. 20. Rescue teams are responsible for assessing damage to the ventilation system.

21. Information the team relays to the fresh-air base as it proceeds is known as the “progress report”.

22. It is the responsibility of rescue team members to have all the information needed

to do the work. 23. When a team locates a body, its location and position should be marked on a mine

map and on the roof or rib close to the body. 24. The rescue team captain should regulate the team’s pace according to conditions

encountered.

25. When a body is first located, every effort should be made not to disturb any possible evidence in the area.

26. In situations too hazardous for teams to explore and reventilate safely, teams may

be instructed to seal the area. 27. New mine rescue team members must have at least 20 hours of instruction on the

breathing apparatus used by the team. 28. Before the team leaves the fresh-air base to travel inby, the captain should take

note of the time of departure. 29. It is recommended that team checks be conducted every 15 to 20 minutes.

30. It is recommended that the first stop for a team check be just inby the fresh-air base.

31. Teams should report the lowest team member’s oxygen gauge reading at each team check.

68

32. “Tying in” is the process by which you systematically explore all crosscuts and

adjacent areas as you advance. 33. As the team advances underground, the captain takes the lead.

34. It is important that the team pace its work so that it can return to the fresh air base on time.

35. As the team advances, the map man records what the team encounters by

marking the information on a mine map. 36. The team is responsible for choosing the exact sites within headings for building

seals. 37. Smoke causes a lack of orientation which may cause a team member to lose

his/her sense of balance.

38. Class B fires involve flammable or combustible liquids. 39. Class D fires involve combustible metals.

40. Before using a hand held extinguisher it must be checked for the type of fire you are fighting.

41. Solubility is the ability of a gas to be dissolved in water.

42. Pools of water can release water soluble gases into the air when they are stirred

up. 43. High expansion foam is light and resilient and can travel long distances to a fire

without breaking down.

44. Low expansion foam is very wet and heavy and can only be used when you’re close enough to a fire to force the foam directly onto the fire.

45. Carbon monoxide is explosive.

46. Oxygen is a supporter of combustion.

69

47. If smoke is so dense as to make visibility poor, you may need to keep in constant physical contact with an object or a rib in order to feel your way along.

48. Two types of fire cannot be fought directly, fuel rich and spon com (spontaneous

combustion).

49. Team safety must not be compromised.

50. Monitoring pressures and gases helps determine the effectiveness of firefighting and the potential danger of an explosion.

51. Sulfur dioxide and hydrogen sulfide are water soluble gases. 52. Color, odor, and taste are physical properties that help to identify gases during

barefaced exploration.

53. Only detectors and chemical analysis can positively identify a gas. 54. The effects of toxic gases depend on the concentration, toxicity, and exposure

time. 55. Asphyxiates are gases which cause suffocation or choking.

56. Firedamp is a mixture of methane in air that will burn or explode when ignited. 57. If there is a sufficient amount of hydrocarbons in smoke, the smoke may be

explosive. 58. Ventilation controls are used underground to properly distribute air to all

sections of the mine.

59. Gases with specific gravities less than 1.0 tend to seek high places. 60. Gases with specific gravities greater than 1.0 tend to seek low places.

61. In order to maintain an airlock, one door of the airlock must be kept closed while the other is opened.

70

62. Rescue teams should build an airlock so that the two stoppings are erected as close together as possible yet with enough space to allow room for the team and their equipment to fit in between.

63. If the fresh air base is underground, it should be located where it’s assured a fresh

air travelway to the surface. 64. The fresh air base should be located where it’s assured positive ventilation and

fresh air. 65. Elevators should be tested before use following a disaster.

66. As a team advances, it is important to stay in close contact with the fresh air base/command center.

67. Methane is lighter than air. 68. Normal air has a specific gravity of one.

69. Sufficient time should be allowed for a fire area to cool before it is unsealed. 70. Team captains should inspect roof and ribs before the team members advance

into the area. 71. The roof and ribs should be tested before extinguishing a fire.

72. Hazardous areas should be marked to warn other teams that may enter the area after yours.

73. Progress reports should include reports on roof and rib conditions and gas

conditions. 74. The time spent under oxygen by a rescue team is usually limited to two hours or

less. 75. When looking for survivors, it is important to both look and listen for clues.

76. For a Class C fire (electrical), if power has been cut off to the burning equipment, it may be treated as a Class A or B fire.

77. When survivors are located, their location, identities, and condition should be

reported immediately to the command center.

71

78. When survivors are located, the location, time, and date should be marked on the team’s map and on the rib where they are found.

79. When survivors are located, they should be transported to safety and fresh air as

quickly as possible. 80. The main objective of recovery work is to put the affected area of the mine back in

operation as soon as possible. 81. All temporary seals should be well hitched in the floor roof, and ribs to improve

their strength.

82. Urethane foam is an effective sealant when used around the perimeter of a seal. 83. High volatile coal burns much faster than low or medium volatile coal.

84. It may be necessary to double or triple the thickness of the material in order to

improve the effectiveness of a temporary seal.

85. Seals should be built at locations with good roof and even roof and ribs. 86. Rescue Teams may encounter many hazards while fighting fires directly by hand.

87. When fires are sealed in gassy or dusty mines, a thick coating of rock dust should

be applied to the ribs, roof and floor for several hundred feet outby the seals.

88. The main objectives of exploration work during a mine fire are locating the fire and assessing conditions in the fire area.

89. A self-contained breathing apparatus is a completely portable unit that supplies

oxygen or air independently of the surrounding atmosphere. 90. A smoke tube is used to show the direction and velocity of slow moving air.

91. If a team member must return to the fresh air base because of a problem, it is standard practice among teams for the entire team to go back with that person.

72

92. Thermal imaging cameras should only be used in less than 1 percent of Methane. 93. Once rescued, survivors should never be left alone.

94. The lower explosive limit of hydrogen is 4.0 percent. 95. The IDLH of Nitrogen Dioxide is 20 ppm.

96. Clean, dry air at sea level is made up of 78 percent nitrogen and 21 percent oxygen.

97. After a fire has been sealed, it is recommended to wait 72 hours before making

the initial visit to the seals. 98. When appropriate, a fire area is not un-sealed until the oxygen content is low

enough to make explosions impossible and the carbon monoxide has disappeared.

99. Firefighters force inert gases into areas where they are trying to remove the

oxygen leg of the fire triangle. 100. A team is a unit made up of individuals working toward a common goal.

SECTION I

2018

Mine Rescue

RULES

2018 MINE RESCUE CONTEST RULES INDEX

Section I Title Page

General Information for Conducting 2018 Mine Rescue Contests .................................... 1

Rules Governing the 2018 Mine Rescue Contests ............................................................... 3 Radio Frequencies ................................................................................................................. 6 Written Examination ............................................................................................................ 8 Fresh-Air Base Procedures ................................................................................................... 8 Miscellaneous ........................................................................................................................ 9 Interpretations of A Cards ................................................................................................... 9 Interpretations of B Card ................................................................................................... 15

Proper Method of Roof Testing ............................................................................................ 39

Extent of Gas ........................................................................................................................... 43

Initial Exploration Under Rule 29 ........................................................................................ 44

Mine Map Legend .................................................................................................................. 46

Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus .................................................................................. 51 Biomarine, BioPak 240-R Donning Procedures .............................................................. 52 Draeger BG-4 Self Contained Breathing Apparatus ...................................................... 52 CAREvent® DRA Automatic Rescue Ventilator ............................................................ 53

Detecting Instruments ........................................................................................................... 54 CMX 270 Continuous Carbon Monoxide, Methane, and Oxygen Monitor ................ 54 MSA Passport Personal Alarm .......................................................................................... 55 LTX 310 Multi-Gas Monitor ............................................................................................... 56 TMX 410 Multi-Gas Monitor ............................................................................................. 57 TMX 412 and ATX 620 Multi-Gas Monitors .................................................................... 58 CSE Explorer 4 Multi-Gas Monitor................................................................................... 59 ITX Multi-Gas Monitor ....................................................................................................... 60 MSA Solaris .......................................................................................................................... 61 MSA ALTAIR 4X Multi-gas Detector .............................................................................. 62

M40M Multi-Gas Monitor .................................................................................................. 63 MX4 and MX6 iBrid Multi-Gas Monitors ........................................................................ 64 Drager X-am 2000 and Drager X-am 5000 Multi-Gas Detector .................................... 65

Statements of Fact .................................................................................................................. 66

1

GENERAL INFORMATION FOR CONDUCTING 2018 MINE RESCUE CONTESTS

Mine Rescue Rules were designed as a training tool for mine rescue teams. The gas levels, limits, travel distances, water levels, etc. were developed for contest purposes only. Discretion should be used in actual mine emergency situations. If a mine rescue problem(s) is utilized to comply with Part 49 the problem(s) must be submitted and certified by the National Contest Director(s).

1. Mine rescue teams must be composed of persons who are bonafide employees of

mining companies or persons who are designated or contracted by mining companies to fulfill the requirements of 30 CFR Part 49 mine rescue coverage.

2. All mine rescue teams must report to isolation at the designated time on each

day of their participation. The number of persons in isolation will be limited to ten uniformed team members.

3. Teams are required to bring with them a sufficient supply of materials and

apparatus accessories.

Teams cannot expect recharging materials and facilities, apparatus parts, and accessories for the several types of apparatus to be made available at the contest site.

4. In mine rescue ties, B cards will be the first tie breaker; mine maps (the Team

map and the Briefing Officer or command center map whichever is designated by the team) will be the second tie breaker; written examinations will be the third tie breaker; time cards will be the fourth tie breaker; and actual time to work the problem(s) will be the fifth tie breaker.

5. Mine rescue teams shall be notified by posting when they may review their map and scorecards. Within one hour of posting, the team captain, team trainer, briefing officer or command center attendant, and map man shall report to a designated location. Teams will have 20 minutes to review and prepare any written protests. All protests will be considered by the Final Appeals Committee. Under no circumstance will video tape recordings or photographs be introduced as supplementary material for consideration by the Final Appeals Committee.

6. For a combination team, the three working first aid team members will be chosen

from the registered mine rescue team members.

2

The final ranking of combination teams will be determined from a composite of both days mine rescue scores and the first aid team’s score. In the event a team enters more than one first aid team, the first aid team’s lowest score will be used to determine the final ranking. In the event of ties in the Combination Contest, the final Mine Rescue ranking will be the tie breaker.

7. All pillar blocks will be equal size.

Each team will be provided two blank maps (1” = 10’) for working of the problems. The maps will be labeled Team map and Briefing Officer map.

The statement, problem, or team map must clearly identify entries so that teams can clearly determine the direction to begin exploration. This would include when a team enters the mine from the side or an elevator shaft into the mine.

3

RULES GOVERNING 2018 MINE RESCUE CONTESTS

1. Each team shall be composed of a minimum of seven persons (five working team members, a briefing officer and/or command center attendant, and a patient) and shall be limited to a maximum of ten persons. When teams elect to use a sound-powered telephone communication system (lifeline), teams may provide up to two persons to assist in managing the lifeline. If provided these two persons must be in lock-up and part of the ten member team. The two lifeline persons will not be selected for taking the written examination. Teams will be responsible for managing lifeline behind the contest lifeline judge.

In the event of an emergency, the Contest Director may exempt a team from the seven person minimum, and allow only the replacement of a patient. Each member shall wear a different number, from one to ten, on the arm, at or near the shoulder, with No. l assigned to the captain. Any means of affixing legible numbers on the sleeve of the uniform will be acceptable. After the clock is started only the five working members will be permitted to do work. In the event of an emergency or by problem design the alternate/patient may be substituted for any working team member or briefing officer/command center attendant. The team may decide which position the alternate will fill.

Each team shall have a briefing officer and/or command center attendant, which will accompany only one participating team. Switching of team members including the briefing officer and/or command center attendant from one team to another is prohibited. The briefing officer and/or command center attendant will be stationed at the command center during the working of the problem and will be permitted to communicate with the team via telephone or radio. The briefing officer and/or command center attendant map may be marked with information received from the team while the team is inby the Fresh Air Base. However, the briefing officer and the command center attendant will not be allowed to visually compare their maps. All maps shall be turned in at the completion of the problem. However only the map designated by the team shall be used for scoring purposes. The team will designate the map to use by checking the box in the lower right hand corner. If neither map is identified by the team for scoring the Briefing Officer map will be scored, unless the only map completed was the command center attendant map.

Briefing officers/command center attendants meeting the physical requirements may substitute for any team member if so desired.

2. Each team shall provide its own breathing apparatus for each member of the

team. A breathing apparatus approved for at least four hours shall be used in

4

mine rescue contest problems. Other approved breathing apparatus may be used on patients. Each team member must wear safety boots, an MSHA approved protective hat and cap light, and members must be similarly dressed. During the working of the problem, the cap lights may or may not be turned on but must be operational. The wearing of self-rescuers is not required for Contest work. Each team member must have a metal identification tag attached to his/her belt. Each team must have at least one stretcher capable of transporting an unconscious person. Each team must have at least one portable fire extinguisher rated at 2A10BC with a minimum five-pound capacity. Fire extinguishers can be used more than once if multiple fires are encountered during the problem.

3. Each team must have its own breathing apparatus approved under Part 84, Title 42, Code of Federal Regulations. Any team that anticipates using a breathing apparatus not listed in the rules must provide, at the time of registration, written instructions outlining the proper donning procedures for such apparatus.

4. Gas testing devices used by teams shall be approved by MSHA, and only instruments which give an accurate reading for percent by volume or parts per million shall be used. Any team that anticipates using an instrument not listed in the rules shall provide, at the time of registration, written instructions outlining the proper procedures for checking and testing with such instruments.

5. Teams must assure themselves that before they report to the mine entrance or fresh-air base all apparatus are fully assembled, airtight, and ready to wear. Cylinder pressures must be within specifications of approval. Spare apparatus are not required to be tested as part of the equipment check at the fresh-air base. Full practice canisters or other acceptable canisters must be in place in the apparatus. Each team will be responsible for the proper removal of all waste material from the competition site (i.e. canisters or chemicals).

6. Teams shall be equipped with and use a portable or a sound powered communication system approved by MSHA. The wires or cable shall be of sufficient tensile strength to be used as a manual communication system. Teams may use standard signals if the communication system fails. Wireless communication systems may be used, provided they are designed and used in such a manner that the integrity of the Contest is not jeopardized, as determined by the Contest Director.

Upon registration the team shall properly identify their radios and provide the programmed channels and frequencies for their radios. The team must provide their fully charged radios immediately upon arrival to a guard in isolation/lock- up on the day of the contest. When selecting a channel for team competition, their radios will be set by a designated contest official on a channel that is different from other radios in use.

5

The mine superintendent or other designated person will check and monitor conversations on the channel selected. In the event of failure of the radio provided to the mine superintendent or other designated person, corrective actions will be immediately taken by the team.

Teams may take up to three radios inby the fresh air base and must provide at least three to be used by the command center and the mine superintendent or other designated official. Teams may leave additional radios in the fresh air base and command center for use in case of malfunctions. A minimum of three radios shall remain operational during the working of the problem. This consists of: one radio each for the team underground, the command center and the mine superintendent or other designated person. This complement of radios is necessary to be considered as using wireless communication.

Teams using wireless communication must have radios charged and properly programmed to the MSHA FCC licensed radio frequencies prior to turning them over to contest officials.

MSHA licensed radio frequencies and settings such as PL codes, low power, and narrow banding protect MSHA and teams from FCC violations and prevent crosstalk between competing teams.

All radios are to be MSHA approved and intrinsically safe. VHF radios must support at least 3 channels. UHF radios must support at least 16 channels.

6

National Mine Rescue Contest Radio Frequencies

Channel UHF PL Channel VHF

1 451.8000 71.9 1 151.5050

2 456.8000 82.5 2 154.5275

3 461.0375 94.8 3 158.4000

4 461.1375 103.5

5 462.7625 110.9

6 462.8375 118.8

7 464.5500 127.3

8 466.0375 136.5

9 466.1375 146.5

10 469.5625 156.7

11 461.0875 167.9

12 469.5000 179.9

13 461.0625 192.8

14 464.5000 210.7

15 466.0875 225.7

16 469.5500 241.8

IWT (Innovative Wireless Radios) are approved for the use at the National Coal Contest. Tape will be put over the message screen and if removed during the working of the problem, the team may be disqualified.

4 Channels are available: With frequencies of 903 to 927 MHZ

(Channels 1 thru 4 with the use of a Portable Mesh Node)

A lifeline will still be required for working of the problem. This can be achieved through the use of a communication reel or rope, wire or cable, etc., which has sufficient tensile strength to be used as a manual communication system.

Anyone anticipating using wireless communication shall notify the Contest Director at official registration for the 2018 event. Wireless communication systems will be prohibited in the isolation area. This includes personal pagers, cellular phones, radios, laptop computers, etc.

7

7. Each team must be under guard, in a designated location, before the start of the Contest. Teams must remain continuously under guard until time to work the problem. Teams that have competed will not be permitted to return to the isolation area or communicate with any teams awaiting their turn to compete.

8. Any team or member receiving information concerning a Contest problem prior

to arriving at the fresh-air base will be disqualified by the Chief Judge and Director.

Any team or member receiving unauthorized information concerning a Contest problem after arriving at the fresh-air base may be disqualified by the Chief Judge and Director or discounted under Rule 37.

This will include smart phones, smart watches, pagers, or any other electronic device capable of sending or receiving information.

9. Teams will not be permitted to furnish or make placards indicating materials or

equipment and then simulate their use.

8

WRITTEN EXAMINATION

1. During isolation, contest officials will select one team member from the five working team members to take the written examination. One number will be drawn which will apply to all teams. The written examination will be ten statements of fact taken verbatim from the contest rules. Each statement shall contain a blank space which shall represent a key word, with no more than two consecutive blanks per statement. Answers will be multiple choice with three choices. Answers will not be intentionally misspelled. “None of the above” shall not be used as one of the choices.

A maximum of fifteen minutes will be allowed for the team member to take the test.

2. Team members taking the written examination will not be permitted to take any written material or information into the testing area.

3. There will be no discussion during the time that written examinations are being

taken.

FRESH-AIR BASE PROCEDURES

1. A video presentation may be shown to the team or a prepared statement will be given to the team prior to arriving at the fresh air base. The prepared statement will include information relating to the mine or section of the mine to be explored. The person in charge of the fresh-air base will introduce himself/herself to the team captain immediately upon arrival of the team at the mine portal or fresh-air base. When the team arrives at the fresh air base, the team will have 4 minutes to position their equipment, lay out lifeline across the fresh-air base/distribute radios and have the SD card loaded in their computer and ready for use. The team will be confined to the fresh-air base during this time period. If the captain fails to start the clock at or before the 4 minutes has elapsed, the clock will be started for them. They will not receive the discount for the captain not starting the clock. The team will be discounted under Rule 49.

2. Each team will be given a written problem and maps. The blank maps and problem will be given to the team immediately after the captain or judge starts the timing device. Time required for studying the problems, checking equipment and getting under oxygen and/or air will be included in the total problem working time.

9

MISCELLANEOUS

1. To rescue people, teams may be required to change existing ventilation, energize power circuits, pump water, or support unsafe roof if it can be done safely. Other methods of recovery will not be accepted (i.e. roping, hooking, etc.).

2. Only judges, Contest officials, news media, and working team members will be permitted in the working areas. Unauthorized persons must stay out of the working area. Photographers who wish to take pictures of the working teams must receive permission from the Director of the Contest.

3. Solid lines on a map denote actual and accurately measured workings. A solid line means there will be no openings from above, below or on the same plane that are not shown on the map.

Dotted lines, on a map, denote projections and may or may not be accurate.

4. Ventilation changes made by the team will reflect general ventilation principles, to direct airflow where it is needed, or block the airflow where it would create a violation of the rules.

Airflow will be considered to enter all openings where exhaust ventilation applies, and exit all openings where blowing-type ventilation applies.

All of the airflow from at least one opening will be required to ventilate a barricade, or remove gases and/or smoke.

Any air movement will move irrespirable and/or explosive gases across an ignition source and/or unexplored area, if not blocked.

If no airflow is indicated in the Fresh Air Base (FAB) or other openings, then none exists, regardless of ventilation controls or fan operation.

If there are no openings/exits which allow air to enter/exit the mine workings inby the Fresh Air Base, air will not travel inby the FAB unless directed; once inby the FAB the above applies. Air may be short circuited across the FAB.

INTERPRETATIONS OF A CARDS

1. For each incorrect answer on written examination. 1

2. Failure to examine gauges and apparatus at not more than 20 minute intervals. This must be done at a team stop. One point for each minute or fraction thereof. (Total discounts are not to exceed 5 points) 1

10

The zero point for the timekeeping process for apparatus checks will begin with the completion of the last person checked during the first apparatus examination and this will be the procedure that will be used throughout the problem. This means that all team members must be checked before the next twenty minutes have elapsed.

3. Failure to complete the problem in the calculated time, for each five minutes overtime, or fraction thereof (not to exceed 10 points) 1

The calculated time will be determined by averaging the working time of all teams participating in the Contest.

Average working time will not be utilized in problems where time limits are set.

The working time for a problem will start when the team captain or judge starts the timing device at the fresh-air base and will continue until the team captain stops the timing device. The team captain or judge must start the timing device immediately before the team receives the maps and problem and before any work is done. In the event the captain fails to start or stop the timing device or the team begins working before the clock is started or continues to work after clock is stopped, working time will be determined by the timekeeper. When the captain stops the timing device, the maps must be submitted to the judges. (No work will be permitted on the map after the timing device has been stopped.)

For teams that do not complete the problem within the time limit:

1. Stop the team, allow no more work. 2. Discount team for everything not mapped, written instructions not

followed and any rules related to patients or missing persons.

3. Discount team an additional; a. 15 points if problem was not completed, or b. 5 points if exploration was completed and team is traveling out of the

mine, or; c. 30 points if the captain stops the clock and doesn’t try to finish the

problem because time is running out.

4. When submitted to the map examiners, conditions and/or objects marked on the team map in any area of the mine not explored by the team, each infraction 2

Conditions and/or objects that are in advance of the point that the captain has traveled shall not be recorded on the map, except for the following conditions when they extend from rib to rib: unsafe roof, caved areas, and water over knee deep. This also includes inextinguishable fires. The captain will examine these

11

areas as close as practical, and this will require them to be located on the mine map.

Objects or conditions passed by the team in the same opening or intersection shall be marked on the map.

5. Failure to locate and record accurately (verbatim) on the team map objects/conditions that should have been found and were indicated to be in the mine, for each omission 2

A. Verbatim means that the card information only has to be in sequence not stacked or oriented like the card. It also means that symbols are not acceptable to replace wording written out on the placard (i.e., (“) cannot be substituted for the word “inches” from a placard).

B. The team is not responsible for locating and mapping objects/conditions that are initially found in the fresh-air base. All objects/conditions located in the fresh air base will be shown on the Team Map, Briefing Officer’s Map and Command Center Attendant’s Map.

C. This discount shall be assessed for all objects/conditions that are not mapped in an area of the mine that the team should have explored if the problem had been worked systematically and correctly or for mapping objects/conditions not found in the mine.

D. Objects/conditions located in areas of elongated unsafe roof, unsafe rib, overhanging brow, and in areas where unsafe roof extends diagonally from rib to rib must be mapped if passed by the team.

E. The legend developed by MSHA and furnished to the teams shall be used by all teams to mark their respective mine maps. Objects/conditions not covered by the legend will be written in by the team and the location of the object/condition indicated by the symbol "X". The team may place any additional information on the mine map concerning objects/conditions found in the mine if it does not adversely affect the legibility of the items/conditions required to be mapped.

F. The marked map as submitted by the team will be compared with the

problem and key map by the map examiners. Objects/conditions located on the map must be within six feet of accuracy and the six foot allowance will be measured from the center point of the object/condition drawn in to the center point of the object/condition denoted on the key map. All objects/conditions mapped by the team must be shown in the entries, crosscuts and openings. If a team fails to explore the entire mine, the farthest point of advance shall be indicated on the map submitted to the map examiners except at locations

12

where the following objects/conditions are encountered: faces, caved areas, water over knee deep, unsafe roof across an opening, seals, stoppings, barricades, and inextinguishable fires. Objects/conditions must be indicated on the team's map submitted to the map examiners. This does not include statements read by the patient or notes given to the team.

G. Information found on notes in lunch boxes, at barricades and any other location must be recorded on the mine map. The map shall reflect an X for each note found. (e. g. one X for the lunch box and one for the note.) These X’s cannot be stacked one on top of the other.

H. Additional information placed on the map by the team cannot be existing symbols that are presently denoted in the legend, regardless of color coding used by the team in mapping.

I. The six foot tolerance will not apply to rib lines or pillar blocks drawn in projected areas, but discounts will be assessed for improperly located objects/conditions in these areas including faces denoted by placards.

J. Dotted line areas (rib lines and pillar blocks and faces) that were explored by the team must be drawn in. 2 per team stop, maximum of 6 per problem.

K. A placard indicating person that is located by the team in an area of elongated unsafe roof, but cannot be reached due to a lack of roof support, shall be mapped as an X with the word person written out. If the team subsequently reaches the person placard and the placard is changed to a body or live person, the proper symbol shall be used in conjunction with the original X.

L. The following changes need to be noted on the team map to indicate the conditions left in the mine and the fresh-air base: fan(s), on or off, exhausting or blowing; changes to ventilation structures (i.e. stoppings, doors, etc.); victims removed from the mine; electrical circuits energized or de-energized; fires extinguished; ignition sources relocated; water pumped; roof supports installed; and in the areas reentered by team, smoke cleared, gases removed, and permanent changes in direction of ventilation. Any terminology which describes these changes is acceptable.

If a team knows that a gas/smoke has been cleared due to a ventilation change but has not returned to that area, they may or may not show the gas/smoke cleared.

M. A single placard which denotes the start and end of any condition requires only one symbol to be mapped.

13

N. Ventilation structures, found intact, such as stoppings, doors, etc. that are initially located and mapped, will remain on the map and any removal of such structure will be reflected by a notation such as removed. If rebuilt in the same location, a notation, such as rebuilt, will suffice.

O. All newly erected, intact and airtight structures built by the team will be considered to be temporary stoppings. Regardless of their use or intention (i.e. ventilation, airlock, seals, etc.) they shall be treated and mapped as a temporary stopping if left intact.

P. After the clock is stopped, the judge’s final ventilation map shall be confirmed on the field with the team captain or his designee.

6. Failure to locate and record on the briefing officer/command center attendant map (if used for scoring purposes) all objects/conditions as described below, that should have been found and were indicated to be in the mine, for each omission 2

The following objects/conditions as found in the mine must be located on the map(s): locations of persons/bodies; smoke; gases; caved areas; unsafe roof; water in depths that prevents travel; ignition sources; fans; fires; faces; ventilation structures (whether intact or not intact, correct symbol is sufficient); brattice cloth; line curtain; seals; barricades; air direction and refuge alternatives.

The following changes need to be noted on the map(s) to indicate the conditions left in the mine and the fresh-air base: fan(s), on or off, exhausting or blowing; intact ventilation structures, changes to ventilation structures (i.e. stoppings, doors, etc.); victims removed from the mine; electrical circuits energized or de- energized; fires extinguished; ignition sources relocated; water pumped; roof supports installed; and in the areas reentered by team, smoke cleared, gases removed, and permanent changes in direction of ventilation. Any terminology which describes these changes is acceptable. If the team fails to explore the entire mine, the team’s farthest point of advance (FPA) must be noted, as per rule 5F. Dotted line areas that were explored by the team must be drawn in, including any faces. 2 per team stop, maximum of 6 per problem.

The legend developed by MSHA and furnished to the teams shall be used to mark their respective mine maps. Objects/conditions not covered by the legend will be written in by the team and the location of the object/condition indicated by the symbol "X". The briefing officer/command center attendant may place any additional information on the mine map concerning objects/conditions found in the mine if it does not adversely affect the legibility of the items/conditions required to be mapped.

14

The marked map as submitted by the team shall be compared with the problem and key map by the map examiners. All objects/conditions required to be mapped must be shown in the order that the captain encounters them and in the correct entries, crosscuts, and openings. (Orientation, verbatim and the six foot tolerances do not apply to the briefing officer/command center attendant map.)

Additional information placed on the map by the team cannot be existing symbols that are presently denoted in the legend, regardless of color coding used by the team in mapping.

7. Each team may have a Command Center Attendant who will accompany only one team and remain in lock up with that team. The Command Center Attendant will be a full time employee of the company/companies that the mine rescue team(s) represents and may or may not be one of the team members referred to in Rule 1 governing the 2018 Mine Rescue Contest. The attendant will use the computer located in the designated Command Center location with the briefing officer.

Each team shall have a briefing officer and/or a command center attendant. The briefing officer and command center attendant will be located in the command center together. When both positions are used, the command center map must be an electronic map. If only the briefing officer is in the command center, he can use either electronic or manual mapping.

The map of the Attendant will be graded for scoring purposes if designated by the team. If the Briefing Officer’s map is used for scoring purposes and there is a discount on the Briefing Officer’s map, the Attendant’s map will be reviewed. If that discount is correct on the Attendant’s map, no discount will be assessed on the Briefing Officer’s map. The same removal of discount will apply if the attendants map is scored and the discount is correct on the briefing officers’ map.

Teams may opt out from the Command Center Attendant.

Teams may bring their own computer provided it meets the specification stated on MSHA’s website. Time to set up their computer is included in the 4 minutes referred to in Rule 1 of the Fresh-Air Base procedures.

15

INTERPRETATIONS OF B CARD

A. Apparatus

1. Apparatus improperly assembled, each apparatus 3

Failure to fasten covers, snaps, etc.

Full practice canisters or other acceptable canisters must be in place and used in the apparatus.

2. Apparatus improperly adjusted to the wearer, each person 1

If required, patient must have apparatus on and properly adjusted, even if on stretcher.

This ONLY applies to shoulder straps, chest straps, and head straps that are not properly fastened, are twisted or rolled (separate discount for each strap).

3. Failure to follow prescribed procedures for going under oxygen, each person,

excluding patient 3

This will depend on type of apparatus used.

4. Apparatus part or parts worn or deteriorated so as to be dangerous to the wearer, each person 8

Holes that are in the breathing tubes and straps that break after the wearer goes inby the fresh-air base are discounts.

5. Oxygen supply of team members over specified limitations 2

This will apply to oxygen supply prior to starting work and be determined by the type of apparatus worn.

It does not mean minimum at end of problem.

6. Failure of captain to examine gauges, apparatus, and to have his/her gauges,

apparatus examined before entering the mine, or going inby the fresh air base each apparatus 2

7. Failure to make proper apparatus examination during any required

apparatus check, each infraction 1 (Maximum 5 Points)

16

Each team captain will examine gauges and apparatus of team members and have his gauge and apparatus examined by a team member.

A proper apparatus examination will include a visual examination of the gauge, facepiece, hoses, and determine by sight or feel, that the protective cover is secure. If the gauge has a protective holder, the gauge must be put back into the holder after viewing.

The team member making the check must obtain assurance from the person being checked that the person is all right. A verbal response from the person that he/she is all right will suffice.

8. Not wearing goggles in conjunction with an SCSR when smoke is

encountered, each patient, each infraction 2

Means any smoke.

9. Team members breathing external air inby the fresh-air base, each team member, each infraction (excluding patient) 10

10. Team not following proper procedure in case of apparatus failure, each infraction 6

Proper procedure would depend on type of apparatus; however, team must proceed to fresh-air base or other such designated location immediately.

Proper procedure for returning simulated malfunctioning apparatus to use would be to take apparatus off and set it on the ground at the fresh-air base or other such designated location, and then put it back on following the prescribed procedures for getting under oxygen.

11. Failure to properly protect patient, secure patient to stretcher, cover patient with blanket, or placing patient on stretcher in such a way as to foul proper operation of apparatus, each omission 2

Failure to properly protect the patient shall be assessed when the team drops the patient.

Patient should be secured to stretcher by at least two bandages or straps, one around trunk of body and one around legs, covered with blanket from the neck to and including the feet and placed so as not to crimp air hoses. The bandages or straps shall be fastened perpendicular to the patient's body. The patient’s arms may or may not be secured, but the blanket must cover the patient to the neck.

All unconscious patients must be brought to the fresh-air base on stretchers.

17

12. Failure to conduct a complete initial assessment of each patient. 2 maximum per patient

An initial assessment must be conducted of all live persons who are encountered during the working of the problem. The assessment should commence once the captain has physically made contact with the person. Any of the five working team members may be utilized to conduct the assessment. However, the team member starting the assessment of a live person will continue and complete the assessment.

When assessing a conscious live person, a team member must physically contact the patient and verbalize the following assessments.

1. Ask if he/she is okay; asking person if he/she is “alright” will suffice. 2. Looking for life threatening injuries.

When assessing an unconscious live person, a team member must physically contact patient and verbalize the following assessments.

1. Ask patient if he/she is okay; asking if he/she is “alright” 2. Look for absence of breathing or gasping. 3. Check for presence of a carotid pulse (5-10 seconds). 4. Looking for life threatening injuries.

B. Auxiliary Equipment and Testing Devices

1. Failure to take necessary equipment and gas-detecting devices to work the problem, each omission 2

Failure to take necessary equipment or testing devices underground; discount should be assessed even if team returns to fresh-air base to pick up necessary equipment.

14. The following equipment must be examined after the clock is started and before the entire team goes underground or inby the fresh-air base 2

Communication system: communications between the team and briefing officer or command center attendant shall be tested before the team advances inby the fresh-air base. All gas detecting instruments used or taken inby the fresh-air base must be examined in the presence of a judge. (After examining, gas detecting instruments may be turned off during the working of the problem.)

18

15. Equipment failing to function properly, if not corrected before entering the mine, each infraction 4

Faulty equipment must be left at the fresh-air base.

16. Failure to secure extra approved breathing apparatus or device to stretcher 2

Extra apparatus must be secured to stretcher to prevent it from falling off.

C. Communication and Signaling

17. Failure to arrange standard lifeline pull signals 3

A team must arrange standard lifeline pull signals with the judge handling the lifeline after the clock is started and before the entire team goes underground or inby the fresh-air base.

A team using wireless communication is not required to arrange standard lifeline signals prior to the entire team going underground. However, standard lifeline signals must be arranged prior to the entire team going underground if the team has retreated to the fresh air base due to communication failure and a sound-powered communication system with lifeline will be used for the completion of the problem.

18. Failure to give proper notification with lifeline or communication system of

team's intentions, (total discounts not to exceed 6 during working of problem) each infraction 1

The following verbal or standard lifeline pull signals shall be used between the No. 5 team member and the command center or lifeline judge:

Signal Meaning

1 pull or "Stop" Stop if traveling or "All Right" if team is at rest.

2 pulls or "Advance" Team will advance and take lifeline from fresh-air base.

3 pulls or "Retreat" Team will retreat and give lifeline to fresh-air base. If this signal is made from the fresh-air base to team, then team should return to fresh-air base at once.

When using wireless communication/link line, if the captain is leading, the team is “advancing”; if the tail captain is leading, the team is “retreating”

19

4 pulls or "Help" Team is in distress.

A team using a telephone or wireless communication system must report its intentions to the command center. Constant communication shall be maintained with the command center unless a malfunction occurs.

A team will not be discounted if the communication system fails if they have back-up radios, secondary telephone communications, or, if they change to using the standard lifeline pull signals. If the lifeline breaks, the team must immediately repair the lifeline or return to the fresh-air base.

If team’s communication system fails, the team may do work necessary to repair the system. The only verbal communication between the team and the command center must relate to repairing the communication system. Teams will be discounted under Rule 37 for any other communication. When repairing the communication system, working team members may enter the isolation area.

Teams may only use standard lifeline signals if their communication system fails. If the team is using standard lifeline signals, verbal communications between the working team members and the command center is allowed. No comparison of the maps can be made.

Failure to notify the command center by voice communication or lifeline judge by lifeline pull signals of team's intentions would include advancing or retreating team inby the fresh air base prior to notifying and receiving a reply. If the team is stopped and gives a signal to retreat or advance, the No. 5 team member must await return signal prior to moving. When traveling and the No. 5 team member gives signal to stop, the No. 5 team member may not move more than two steps after receiving return signal .

Signals need not be initiated by the Captain.

Improper signals would apply only to signals transmitted between the No. 5 team member and the command center or lifeline judge. If an improper signal is corrected prior to team moving, the team shall not be discounted. To correct an improper signal, the No. 5 team member gives a "Stop" signal prior to moving, then gives corrected signal and receives the reply from the command center or lifeline judge.

All team members must hold or be attached to the team link line while traveling. The team link line shall be not more than 28 feet in length and a

20

non-extendable tagline not more than 36 inches in length may be used from a team member to the team link line.

19. The team must notify the command center and obtain permission before ventilation changes are made or power circuit’s energized 2

Ventilation changes will be considered as starting, stopping, or redirection of the air current or changes of the constituents. Dropping a line curtain, extinguishing a fire, or opening a valve, is not considered to be a ventilation change. Boreholes cannot be used for ventilation purposes. The removal of any contaminant by the use of a line curtain and ventilating air current will require the inby end of the line curtain to be within five feet of the extent of the contaminant. If the extent of the contaminant is less than five feet inby the rib line, then the line curtain must break the imaginary rib line. If water is being pumped, teams must wait until placards have been changed by the Contest officials before assuming the water has been lowered. At the team’s request and direction, the command center will be responsible for starting, stopping, or reversing fans, and for energizing and de-energizing power circuits. Contest Officials will designate whether work done in the fresh air base will be conducted by the competing team or by back-up teams. If backup team is utilized, they will be limited to making ventilation changes in the fresh air base if the working team captain has performed a roof and rib test for that ventilation structure.

20. Failure to take lifeline/link line or other communication system into the mine 10

This would apply only if all team members were inby the fresh-air base.

Teams must carry sufficient rope, wire or cable to be used as a lifeline when smoke is encountered. The lifeline must be attached on the outby end of the smoke and left in place until the team travels back through the smoke.

Teams using radios may carry a small reel containing rope, wire or cable, etc., which has sufficient tensile strength to be used as a manual communication system, to be used in the event smoke is encountered.

21. In air clear of smoke, none of working team members having hold of lifeline/link line or having it firmly attached to his/her person. 2

Lifeline/link line dropped by all members. Teams using radios may achieve this by having hold of their link line.

21

Does not apply on the surface or at the fresh-air base unless otherwise required by the Rules.

22. In smoke, each team member not having hold of lifeline/link line, or not being firmly attached to his/her person, each infraction 2

Applies to any smoke. All team members must be in air clear of smoke before any team member drops lifeline/link line. Would include checking entrances or portals inby the imaginary line of the openings. Any part of a team member (hand, etc.) in smoke, entire team is in smoke.

Teams using radios shall secure their lifeline in a location that is clear of smoke and continue with that lifeline traveling into or through the smoke to air clear of smoke, and retreat through the smoke using the reverse procedure.

Where: A. No. 5 man does not travel into smoke. Captain and other team

members may travel into smoke. All members must hold or be firmly attached to lifeline and/or link line. Captain’s travel limited by rules covering exploration (e.g. 25’ limit.)

B. Team intends to ventilate smoke over the team; all members must hold or be firmly attached to lifeline and/or link line.

D. Gas and Roof Testing

23. Failure of captain to test the roof, faces, and/or ribs by the sound and vibration method, each infraction (maximum – 4 points at any one location except fires. An improper roof test is a maximum of 2 - each infraction).

Roof and rib tests need to be made only once where the roof is designated as unsafe, caved areas, prior to building a temporary stopping, rebuilding a stopping and at faces.

No team member may perform work or move into any area during a team stop until the captain makes the appropriate roof examination for that area. This would include either a sound and vibration method or a visual examination by the captain's physical presence.

In an intersection, placards related to roof conditions on imaginary rib lines will be considered as being discovered when the captain enters the intersection. In these cases, the sound and vibration method must be made by the captain prior to any team member leaving the

22

intersection to an unexplored area. Team members may be in the intersection prior to the test being made. (For further guidance, refer to Rule 29)

Team members can follow directly behind the captain as the captain makes roof test. (Roof test does not have to be completed for whole area.)

If it can be done safely, all roof tests shall be made from rib to rib, and the face, roof, and each rib at faces of places. Where conditions permit, the full extent of the condition requiring roof and/or rib tests shall be tested. All roof and rib tests shall be made using the sound and vibration method. No sound and vibration method roof and rib tests are required at the areas of overhanging brows or unsafe ribs.

The proper way to make roof tests along an extended area of unsafe roof would be to make roof tests from rib to rib at the outby end of the unsafe roof, zigzag between the edge of the unsafe roof and the adjacent rib, and make tests from rib to rib at the inby end. See Figure 1(a) and 1(b). If an example is not shown in the rules then a zigzag test will be sufficient.

Prior to extinguishing a fire, roof and rib tests shall be made from rib to rib. When a fire is in an intersection, the tests must be made from imaginary rib line to imaginary rib line, perpendicular to the direction of team travel in the area the team member(s) work to extinguish a fire. The initial roof test, prior to extinguishing a fire, will suffice until the team advances (meaning that the No. 5 person passes the fire) or the team retreats and returns to the fire area; at which time a roof test will be required. Thereafter, roof and rib tests perpendicular to the route of travel must also be made prior to each time a team member(s) travels through the area where the fire was located. The entire team traveling through the area as a unit would only require one test. (This test must be made by the captain before any team member travels past the location of the fire.) One test will suffice at each team stop after the fire is extinguished.

Roof test of fire at intersection must be perpendicular and from imaginary line to imaginary line. However, a zigzag roof test will be acceptable as an alternative test on subsequent trips through the fire area if a diagonal ventilation structure has been installed. (Diagonal structure will not have to be removed and the test will be comparable to the roof test illustrated for diagonal unsafe roof).

The roof and rib test must be made at all fires, including inextinguishable fires.

24. Failure to make necessary gas tests where required, each location 5

23

A. If conditions permit, tests for methane, carbon monoxide, and oxygen deficiency shall be made at each team stop that is required by the problem or rules during initial exploration in unexplored areas and at the following normal/required areas to be tested: all mine entrances; entrances to sections of the mine to be explored; faces; walls of overcasts or undercasts, stoppings, ventilation doors, barricades, and seals, (if intact and airtight); all fires; sample pipes or tubes in airtight seals (valves must be opened before testing if closed); open boreholes; exhaust fans and object/condition that prohibits further travel in that direction (including cut into old works, etc.).

Gas tests made during apparatus checks are not normal areas to be tested.

B. Methane, carbon monoxide and oxygen deficiency tests shall be made in each opening to an intersection before the team advances or retreats from that intersection. Gas tests need not be made from rib to rib. Tests may be made at any location in the opening within 25 feet from the original stopping point of the captain or No. 5 team member if conditions permit. In order to properly check an opening, mine entrance, or section entrance, the gas detecting instruments used shall be extended inby the imaginary line of the rib lines of the openings or entrances. This also applies to all openings, tying back past the imaginary rib lines previously explored. However, openings or entrances containing unsafe roof, caved areas, water over knee deep from rib to rib at or outby the imaginary line to the opening shall be tested immediately outby the condition.

Teams passing an opening without first checking that opening and making necessary gas test’s, shall be discounted. Teams advancing inby an opening to a point that the No. 5 team member is at or inby the rib will be considered to have passed that opening.

C. Teams must check all entrances to the area to be explored prior to the entire team going underground or inby the fresh-air base. Entrances may be checked in air clear of smoke without the use of a lifeline so long as the entire team does not go underground or inby the fresh-air base. The captain shall not advance more than 25 feet inby the imaginary line of the opening prior to the entire team advancing underground or inby the fresh-air base.

D. The constituents of the air enclosed by separations intended or indicated

to be airtight will be considered unknown and must be determined by the Captain before other team members enter such area. Actual constituents

24

may be indicated by the use of placards. If a stopping has a hole in it, a gas test is not required prior to entry.

E. When smoke is encountered, it will be considered to extend to a placard

stating the “end of smoke” or a separation intended or indicated to be airtight.

If methane, carbon monoxide, or oxygen deficiency is found in an opening containing a separation intended or indicated to be airtight, the gas will be considered to extend to the airtight separation or to a gas placard indicating a change in the gas constituents. If methane carbon monoxide, or oxygen deficiency is encountered in other locations, it will be considered to extend to a gas placard indicating a change in the gas constituents or the next normal/required area to be tested for that gas, depending on direction of team travel, at which time the continuance or discontinuance of the gas will be determined by gas placard or by results of the tests. See Figure 4. Methane, carbon monoxide and oxygen quantities will be shown on all gas placards. The order of the gases shown on the placards will be methane first, carbon monoxide second, and oxygen third (example see below). Air clear placards will not be used.

% CH4 PPM CO % O2

F. Areas in which gas tests have been performed need not be retested when a

team re-enters the area unless ventilation has been changed. Upon re- entry into any area where the ventilation has been changed, including subsequent ventilation changes, teams shall make examinations for methane carbon monoxide, and oxygen deficiency at the location of all placards where any of these gases were encountered on the initial exploration into the area. These tests shall be made prior to the entire team passing the initial location of the placard. Tests are not required at other locations upon re-entry. Areas that are affected by ventilation changes but not re-entered by a team need not be retested.

25. Improper procedure when testing with gas detectors. 2 maximum at each

required location not to exceed 10 total per problem.

A proper test for methane, carbon monoxide and oxygen shall require the following actions by the team:

25

METHANE - Detector shall be held at eye level or higher

CARBON MONOXIDE - Detector shall be held at chest (between neck and waist) level

OXYGEN DEFICIENCY - Detector shall be held below the waist level

The team member shall verbally identify each test.

E. Miscellaneous

26. Failure of team captain to legibly mark date, initials, and team number on the check board at mine portal or fresh-air base after the timing device is started, each omission 2

Captain must legibly mark date, initials, and team number on check board after clock is started but before the entire team travels inby the fresh-airbase.

Team number means the team's working position number drawn during registration at the Contest.

27. Failure of the captain to mark legibly, with chalk, the date and his/her initials

at the following locations: barricades, stoppings, ventilation doors, seals, walls of overcasts and undercasts, the location of all faces, bodies, live persons, outer door of refuge alternatives and points where objects/conditions prohibit further travel in that direction, not to exceed 12 points 2

These dates and initials must be marked at each required location, during the initial exploration, before the team advances or retreats from that area. Dates and initials are not required if the live person or body cannot be reached due to the conditions of the mine.

The captain must mark the date and his/her initials at team/backup team built stoppings, at each location where they are constructed, and after the building process has begun, but before the clock is stopped or the stopping is moved.

Such places only need to be marked once. Date and initials are not required at ventilation controls completely destroyed.

Date means correct month, day, and year. Dates and initials are not to be placed on placards, but at the location.

26

28. Failure of teams to stop within 50 feet of the fresh-air base to check team members and apparatus 4

The first examination must be made when the team is stopped within the first 50 feet, and with all team members underground or inby the fresh-air base to check apparatus. This examination must be made at the first stop when entire team is inby fresh-air base or portal even though the 50 foot limit has not been reached. This examination is also required on the affected apparatus upon initial re- entry inby the fresh-air base after such apparatus has been repaired or changed.

The team captain shall not exceed 50 feet; however, all team members must be underground, inby the fresh-air base or bottom of air shaft. When the team enters the mine through an air shaft, this examination must be made at the bottom of the air shaft.

29. Any team member traveling more than 25 feet from the captain or No. 5 team member's original stopping point, each infraction 2

During initial exploration, when a team advances into an intersection and makes a team stop, exploration into the openings will be limited to 25 feet from the captain or No. 5 team member’s original stopping point or to the imaginary line of the next intersection, whichever is the lesser distance. (The Captain’s stopping point cannot be inby the imaginary line of the next intersection.) See Figure 5.

All placards that require an action in an intersection must be addressed prior to any team member breaking the imaginary rib line(s) of an opening off the intersection.

Before advancing into an unexplored intersection, teams will be required to explore all accessible areas at each team stop up to the imaginary line of the next intersection or to an object/condition that prohibits further travel in that direction. See Figure 5. This includes initial exploration into all entries from the fresh air base/surface/bottom of shaft.

If a team leaves an intersection/team stop prior to exploring all accessible areas at that team stop, the team must return to that team stop and complete the exploration prior to advancing to the next intersection/team stop.

27

At any team stop, travel will be limited to 25 feet from the captain or No. 5 team member’s original stopping point.

The 25 foot limit shall also apply when the team is attached to the lifeline.

30. Captain or other team member who acts to endanger self or patient, 5 points each team member or patient, each infraction maximum 15 points each occurrence 5 (except Part F)

Each team member that endangers self will be assessed points for each endangerment (when less than three members are involved as described below):

A. Travel under unsafe roof, unsafe rib, or overhanging brow. See Figures 2 and 2 (a).

Teams supporting unsafe roof:

1. If both ends of the unsafe roof have been previously tested by sound and vibration method, timbers must be set in sequence as follows:

a. set first timber outby unsafe roof

b. set additional timbers in unsafe roof at no more than five foot intervals

c. set last timber inby unsafe roof before any other work is done (except for recovering patient found in the unsafe roof) or team passes through the area.

2. If neither end of the unsafe roof has been examined by the sound and vibration method, roof testing and timbers must be set in sequence as follows:

a. test roof on outby end of unsafe roof (Rule 23)

b. set first timber outby unsafe roof

c. set additional timbers in unsafe roof at no more than five foot intervals

d. set last timber inby unsafe roof

e. test roof on inby end of unsafe roof before any other work is done (except for recovering patient found in the unsafe roof) or team passes through the area. (Rule 23)

28

Outby/inby verbiage is interchangeable depending on the direction the unsafe roof is approached.

B. Travel into or through water over knee deep. When water is encountered, the extent of the water will be denoted by placards.

C. Passing a fire in the same opening or intersection the team is traveling without first extinguishing the fire.

D. Not immediately retreating to the fresh-air base when the manufacturer's warning device of the apparatus is activated. If visual contact has been made with a patient, the patient may be removed simultaneously with the team. (No additional work such as setting/retrieving timbers or the completion of building any structure can be done to rescue the patient.) The team may perform gas test, roof and rib test and D&I’s at such location, but may not advance inby the captain’s location at the time of the activation or simulation.

a. The activation of the warning whistle will require the team to return to the fresh-air base and change out the apparatus or bottle. If the activation of the warning whistle is a simulated event, the team may simulate replacement (may verbally state changing bottle). Upon re-entry, the 50-foot apparatus check must be made.

E. Removing any roof support that is set, whether found or installed by the team.

F. Ventilating an unexplored area with irrespirable air when the location of a potentially live person is unknown. Any unaccounted for person is considered to be a potentially live person. If a team explores all sides of overcasts or undercasts, all ends of ventilation tubes and the bottom of shafts, the in-between areas are considered explored. This discount will be assessed for each irrespirable mixture passed over each unexplored area (# of mixtures x # of areas x 5 point discount x # of unaccounted for persons (maximum 3 persons).

When a body is located in an area of elongated unsafe roof and the team finds and maps the body, the location of the body will be considered known. This will apply even if there are conditions that prevent the captain from physically examining the body.

G. Ventilating over an inextinguishable fire.

29

31. Any act by a team which may result in an explosion of an explosive air/gas mixture 30 This discount will be assessed for each explosive mixture passed over each unexplored area or ignition source (# of mixtures x # of areas x 30 point discount).

A. Changing conditions of the mine ventilation system in such a manner that an explosive mixture is moved over an ignition source.

B. Continuing exploration after conditions are found to indicate an

imminent explosion is possible by the presence of an explosive mixture and evidence of fire (visual acknowledgment of a fire, smoke or carbon monoxide above 10 ppm), or continuing exploration when energized electrical equipment, energized circuits (including all batteries except cap light batteries) or energized cables are found in an explosive mixture.

Where a withdraw situation exists, the team can go to any location they have already explored at that stop, prior to exiting the mine. The key phrase in this paragraph is “at that stop.”Teams will not be required to perform roof and rib tests or take gas tests where a withdrawal situation is encountered. Teams will not be allowed to extinguish a fire where a withdrawal situation is encountered.

A team must continue to explore if it knows there is a continuous non- explosive separation between the explosive mixture and the evidence of fire or energized cables.

C. Changing conditions of the mine ventilation in such a manner that an explosive mixture is moved over an unexplored area. If a team explores all sides of overcasts or undercasts, all ends of ventilation tubes and the bottom of shafts, the in-between areas are considered explored.

D. Changing conditions of the mine ventilation in such a manner that an explosive mixture is moved over fire, energized electrical equipment, energized electrical circuits (including all batteries except cap light batteries) or energized cables. Energizing electrical equipment, electrical circuits, or cables in an explosive mixture, or moving any of the above ignition sources into an explosive mixture.

An explosive mixture will be present when the methane is between five and fifteen percent inclusively and the oxygen is 12.1 percent or greater. Carbon monoxide, methane and oxygen concentrations will be shown on all gas placards.

30

32. Failure to locate missing persons, each omission 10

The team must stop and the captain examine, by touching with his or her hand, all missing persons (live persons or body) prior to any team member passing the location of the missing person. This will not be considered a team stop by the rules for the purpose of gas testing.

If the Captain cannot physically examine a missing person located under elongated unsafe roof due to a lack of roof support, a team stop will not be required.

If roof support is provided, bodies located under unsafe roof must be examined before the clock is stopped and after all missing persons have been accounted for. See Figure 3.

33. Failure to bring live person to the fresh-air base, each omission 20

Self-explanatory

34. Failure to properly protect a live or potentially live person(s), each omission 10

Proper protection must be used on persons exposed to or found in irrespirable atmospheres. Atmospheres containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen, concentrations of carbon monoxide in excess of 50 PPM or smoke are irrespirable atmospheres. In an irrespirable atmosphere, patient must be protected by an approved breathing apparatus prior to being moved from that location. An unconscious patient must be protected by an approved breathing apparatus or device with full face piece. On a conscious person, if conditions permit, an approved breathing apparatus or self-rescuer may be donned by the patient with the assistance of the team. Training models may be used if sterilized and properly assembled. Simulation of proper donning of approved respiratory apparatus shall not be permitted.

35. Failure to remove irrespirable atmosphere 30

If an irrespirable atmosphere is encountered immediately outby an airtight barricade the team must remove the irrespirable atmosphere before breaching the barricade.

If an irrespirable atmosphere is encountered immediately outby an airtight ventilation structure and verbal contact is made with patient, the team must remove the irrespirable atmosphere before breaching the structure.

31

36. Refuge Alternative; Teams will be discounted under rule 24 for gas tests and/or rule 34 for failure to properly protect patient(s) and/or rule 44 for failure to properly examine.

When a team finds a refuge alternative, the team must enter the refuge alternative at the same team stop by the following method:

Whether the atmosphere outside is respirable or irrespirable, the captain must open the outer door and take a gas test in the airlock prior to any other team member entering the airlock. The team (2 members, the Captain and another team member) may enter into the airlock, close the outer door. If the air inside the airlock is respirable, the team may open the inner door and the captain must take another gas test prior to any other team member entering the area.

If the atmosphere inside the airlock is irrespirable, the team will use the purge valve (placard) for 5 seconds to clear the airlock. The captain will then take a gas test to determine that the irrespirable atmosphere is cleared. The captain will then open the inner door and take a gas test prior to any other team member entering the area.

If the atmosphere outside the refuge alternative is irrespirable, the patient must be protected with an approved breathing apparatus before being removed from the refuge alternative.

Team members entering the airlock may drop their life line at the refuge alternative door (even in smoke) so an airtight airlock is maintained and allow them to move around in the refuge alternative. If smoke is present outside the refuge alternative, once the patient is removed (placed on stretcher if unconscious), team members must immediately reattach themselves to the lifeline.

Objects other than the person or bodies inside the refuge alternative will not need be mapped. Orientation of person or bodies will not need to be mapped as they are found because of limited space of the enclosed refuge alternative. If the live person is unconscious they may be moved outside the refuge alternative before being placed on a stretcher.

37. Team member talking to or receiving information from an unauthorized

person without permission of the judges, each infraction 5

32

Unauthorized information given to the team by the patient would be prohibited.

A person behind a barricade, stopping, etc. may relay information by reading aloud a statement furnished by the judges. No other information on conditions behind the barricade is permitted to be relayed to the team.

38. Failure to follow proper procedure when putting apparatus on patient, each infraction 2

Mask tightness test is not required for an unconscious patient.

39. Assistance lent by supposedly unconscious patient, each infraction 2

Examples such as patient sitting up unassisted or moving arms so as to help in putting on apparatus, or unconscious patient communicating with team. Once any patient is brought to the fresh air base, he/she can remove his/her breathing apparatus and turn it off.

40. Teams leaving patient unattended, each infraction 6

A team member must be within 10 feet of the patient to be considered attended.

41. Failure to remove patient(s) promptly to the fresh-air base, each infraction 6 points maximum per location

a. When a team finds a patient(s), either by visual or verbal contact, every effort must be made to remove them safely and promptly to the fresh-air base. Visual contact will require the captain's presence in the area. Verbal contact is any voice communication from the patient(s) that can reasonably be expected to be heard by the team. Maximum of one (1) live person may be found in each refuge alternative.

b. When a team reaches a patient(s) (visual contact), every effort must be made to remove them safely and promptly to the fresh-air base. Exploring ahead of the location will be limited to 25 feet in any direction. The 25 foot limit will be determined from the stopping point at or outby the patient(s).

Once a team reaches a patient(s), (visual contact), the team may perform any function during this team stop; however teams will not be allowed to build ventilation controls, timber unsafe roof (except to comply with Rule 30A) or pump water unless necessary to recover the patient(s). The team may not continue to explore while exiting with the patient, unless required by the problem design. Once the team starts to exit the mine

33

with a patient(s) the team must continue directly to the fresh air base or surface before retrieving other patient(s).

c. If the team is in verbal or visual contact with a patient, and the team is unable to immediately reach the patient due to the conditions of the mine, the team may continue to explore if necessary for its own or the patient’s safety. During this exploration process, the team may perform any function during team stops. Every patient shall be safely and promptly removed from the mine as soon as means and/or materials are available.

1. If a team finds a patient(s) under or inby an area of unsafe roof and has the necessary roof support available to recover the patient(s), the team must stop and recover the patient. If a team subsequently finds necessary roof support to recover the patient(s), the team must stop (prior to the No. 5 team member passing the roof support), retrieve the roof support and recover the patient(s). The team may perform any function during this team stop; however, teams will not be allowed to build ventilation controls, timber unsafe roof (except to comply with Rule 30A) or pump water unless necessary to recover the patient(s).

2. If a team finds a patient(s) inby an area of water over knee deep and has a pump available to pump the water, the team must stop and recover the patient. If a team subsequently finds a pump, the team must stop (prior to the No. 5 team member passing the pump), retrieve the pump, pump the water and recover the patient(s). The team may perform any function during this team stop; however, teams will not be allowed to build ventilation controls, timber unsafe roof (except to comply with Rule 30A), or pump water unless necessary to recover the patient(s). Exploration may continue, if necessary, to ventilate an explosive mixture prior to energizing the pump.

42. Failure to erect temporary stopping (airlock) when necessary, each infraction 6

Before breaching airtight separations such as: stoppings, doors, seals, barricades, or removing water roofed, an airlock must be formed if conditions on the other side are unknown. When retreating out of a barricade or coming back through a stopping where an airlock has been erected, it will not be necessary to airlock on the way out if this will not change any existing ventilation.

If a person behind the barricade, stopping, etc. verbally relays to the team that the area is “airtight”, an airlock is not required.

34

A refuge alternative is considered to be airtight and is equipped with an airlock therefore no airlock is required to breach the refuge alternative.

An airlock is formed by erecting a temporary stopping at a location(s) that will provide the equivalent airtight separation as the airtight structure or condition breached by the team. An equivalent airtight separation would require an airlock built for each airtight structure removed within one crosscut. An equivalent airtight separation must also be maintained when pumping water roofed. If the water roofed is in an entry or crosscut one build is required; a 3-way intersection two builds are required; a 4-way intersection three builds are required. If there are two sides blocked, one airlock is needed. If there are three sides blocked, two airlocks are needed. If four sides are blocked, three airlocks are needed. This is the minimum requirements for a solid line map and may not prevent air movement on a dotted line map.

When airlocking under an overcast when conditions are unknown, teams will be required to build immediately inby and outby the overcast prior to opening the door of the overcast. When airlocking over an overcast with a door when conditions under the overcast are unknown, teams will be required to build in an entry or crosscut on both sides of the overcast prior to opening the door, depending on orientation of overcast walls. See Figure 6.

43. Failure to erect temporary stopping, reasonably airtight, each infraction 2

Materials used to erect temporary stoppings shall be installed and or constructed as intended by problem design.

If a structure is moved from one location to another, it must be completely dismantled prior to moving.

44. Failure of team to explore or examine workings systematically and thoroughly, each omission 4

Definitions:

Inaccessible: All areas of the mine where team travel is blocked by one or more of the following conditions: seals; unsafe roof rib to rib; inextinguishable fires; water over knee deep and caved areas.

Opening: Any entry or mining that was performed off an entry, room, or crosscut that may or may not connect to another entry, room, or crosscut.

Crosscut: An opening that connects two entries.

35

Contaminant: Any one or more of the following: smoke; carbon monoxide above 10 PPM; methane above one percent; or less than 19.5 percent oxygen. An entry or crosscut will be considered contaminated until the team finds the end of the contaminant.

A. This should be assessed for not exploring all areas of mine that can be explored without endangering team if problem requires entire mine to be explored or leaving accessible areas unexplored outby where team is working and for passing accessible openings.

B. Unless blocked, teams must advance in the contaminated entry or in entries adjacent to the contaminated entry. When a contaminated entry and adjacent entries are blocked, teams may explore/advance in other nearest accessible entries. However, the team will be discounted if it fails to return to the contaminated or adjacent entry at the first open crosscut, and if not blocked, make all further explorations in the contaminated or adjacent entries before advancing into other areas of the mine.

If the team encounters contaminants in multiple entries, the team has the option of which entry to examine first. As the team advances into a contaminated entry and subsequently encounters a placard(s) indicating that all contaminants are cleared prior to reaching an intersection, the team must make further advances in the other contaminated or adjacent entry.

C. When advancing in an entry and an intersection is encountered with open crosscuts on both sides, the team would be required to tie across into the contaminated crosscut first unless the team is required to return to a contaminated entry.

If the team encounters a contaminant in both crosscuts, the team has the option of which crosscut to examine first.

D. Passing or failing to explore an open crosscut.

Team would be required to travel into this opening and tie across into the next intersection. Teams cannot advance from this intersection before tying outby unless the outby entry is blocked. Teams advancing inby an opening to a point that the No. 5 team member is at or inby the inby rib line will be considered to have passed that opening. If a contaminant is found in an open crosscut, teams would be required to tie across in this crosscut after accessible outby areas have been explored.

36

E. Where crosscuts are blocked, the No. 5 team member may not advance beyond the inby corner of the second crosscut before the team ties across and/or behind into all accessible areas outby that crosscut. After the accessible areas outby are completely explored to the side where the two crosscuts were determined, the team will be permitted to explore the original entry until it encounters the second crosscut to the other side. This may require building an airlock or ventilation controls such as a stopping, door, etc., or returning to the fresh-air base, and exploring into other entries at the discretion of the team and according to the conditions of the mine.

This rule requires team to make all accessible areas outby the second crosscut limit (this would include all sides of areas that are inaccessible such as caved, etc.).

F. Inaccessible areas need not be explored unless the team has explored all accessible areas and there are unaccounted for persons or an explosive mixture to be moved through the inaccessible (unexplored) areas.

Teams will be required to pump water or support the roof to explore the inaccessible areas in these cases, if the necessary materials are provided in the problem.

G. Teams cannot explore behind seals, unless required by the problem and then only after all accessible areas of the mine are explored.

45. Only the ventilation material provided will be permitted to be used during the working of the problem. Erected walls of overcasts/undercasts cannot be removed or altered by the team. An overcast cannot be rebuilt as an overcast if completely destroyed, but if the materials from the completely destroyed overcast are on the field they can be used to build temporary stoppings. Other structures located on the course shall be completely disassembled when moved to other locations. 10

46. Less than five team members completing problem, each person 8

Self-explanatory.

47. Failure to examine lunch pails, each infraction 2

Lunch pails may contain important information and therefore shall be examined. Any team member may examine the lunch pail provided he/she does not exceed the 25 foot limit of the captain or No. 5 team member at a team stop. Lunch pails under unsafe roof need not be examined unless teams enter the area.

37

48. Any act by a team member that violates the intent of the problem design layout, each location 10

A. This would include traveling into or passing materials through areas

indicated to be impassible by placards or intended to be impassible by the physical condition indicated. Examples of such areas would include, but not be limited to, caved areas, ribs, faces, water roofed, etc.

B. Isolating equipment, or other energized electrical components with structures other than those depicted in the legend will not be acceptable.

C. Mobile equipment cannot be moved unless indicated as operable on placards.

D. Ventilation structures built by the team may only be placed perpendicular across an entry, crosscut, or opening, or diagonally from corner to corner at intersections.

E. Team members holding up brattice cloth in an attempt to clear a contaminant shall be discounted under this rule and the contaminant shall not be cleared. Line Curtain is the designated curtain provided for teams to hold up in order to remove contaminants from an airtight separation to a corner of the nearest intersection.

49. Failure to comply with other written adopted National Rules not covered in Discount Sheets, each infraction 2

50. Failure of team to follow written instructions provided to the team for working of the Contest problem, per occurrence _ 5

Written problems/instructions should deal with exploration, rescue, recovery and ventilation. If covered under another rule, don’t include in written problem/instructions (e.g., spelling, mapping, etc.) When written instructions require a team to explore the entire mine this will apply to accessible areas and not inaccessible areas as defined in Rule 44F.

Written instructions will be defined as anything given to team after the clock is started. Any information in the written statement given to the team before the clock is started is to inform the team of the conditions leading up to the event and known conditions after the event and will not be discounted under this Rule.

38

Figure 1(a)

39

Figure 1(b)

Figure 2(a)

40

41

Figure 2(b)

Figure 3

42

PROPER INSTALLATION OF ROOF SUPPORT TO RECOVER A PATIENT LOCATED UNDER AN AREA OF ELONGATED UNSAFE ROOF

43

44

Figure 5

Example of Initial Exploration Under Rule 29

Direction of Team Travel

Maximum Extent of Exploration (25')

Team

Stop

Team

Stop

Team

Stop

Team

Stop

45

46

MINE MAP LEGEND

PERMANENT STOPPING

Stopping intact, airtight (No indication of opening(s) or leakage).

PERMANENT STOPPING NOT INTACT, NOT AIRTIGHT

Condition noted on placard must be shown on team map.

TEMPORARY STOPPING

Stopping intact and airtight, this symbol must be used for all found and/or newly erected, intact and airtight, structures built by the team.

TEMPORARY STOPPING NOT INTACT, NOT AIRTIGHT

Condition noted on placard must be shown on the team map.

SEAL

If the seal is equipped with devices such as sampling tubes or water traps, or is damaged, leaking, or destroyed, that particular device or condition must be noted beside the symbol, including gas test results from sampling tube. No gas box symbol is required for sampling tube test results.

DOOR

Can be shown by itself or in ventilation controls. However, the type and size (if indicated by placard) and “open” or “closed” must be written out. Letters to indicate doors or barricades can be parallel or perpendicular to or on the stopping, or adjacent to the structure as shown.

47

LINE CURTAIN

Designated curtain provided for removing contaminated or explosive gases. Hand held by the team.

LINE CURTAIN INSTALLED

The full extent of the line curtain shall be shown. If the

line curtain is partially or completely down, it must be

noted beside the symbol. It cannot be folded or rolled

up.

DIAGONAL

Temporary stoppings used to form a diagonal in an

intersection, shall extend from corner to corner.

BARRICADE

If the placard indicates that the barricade is damaged,

leaking, or destroyed, that particular condition must be

noted beside the symbol.

CAVED

Caved areas are not considered airtight unless the

placard states “airtight” and it will have to be written out

on the map (“airtight”) beside the symbol.

UNSAFE ROOF

Placard must state “unsafe roof”. Any other condition

designated must be noted beside the symbol.. Outline

size if indicated by placard or markings.

48

UNSAFE RIB OR OVERHANGING BROW

Project over ribline and area on map.

WATER

Symbol indicates start and end of water or changes in depth

of water. Write out depth(s) as shown on placard.

SMOKE

Write out “light” or “dense” if indicated on placard; draw in entire

extent of smoke.

BODY

Indicate position of head and feet as body is found. If the word

“body” is on the placard, show symbol for body and denote the

additional information that is shown on the placard.

LIVE PERSON

Write out condition indicated on the placard, such as conscious,

unconscious, walking, etc., indicate position if lying down.

BRATTICE CLOTH

PLACARD INDICATING GAS MIXTURE

Write out as indicated on placard.

% CH4

PPM CO

% O2

AIR MOVEMENT

Write out quantity if shown on placard.

49

FIRE

Write out "smoldering", "raging", etc., if shown on placard. The

fire symbol must be placed over the object on fire.

FARTHEST POINT OF ADVANCE IN ENTRY, ROOM, OR

CROSSCUT

This symbol should only be used where areas inby the farthest

point of advance will not be explored.

FAN

Write out conditions of fan as indicated by placard.

OVERCAST OR UNDERCAST

This symbol is to be used for placards indicating

“overcast/undercast” or “overcast wall”. If the overcast or

undercast is damaged, leaking, or destroyed, that particular

condition must be noted beside the symbol.

LOCATION OF ANY OTHER OBJECTS, CONDITIONS, OR

EQUIPMENT

Write the name of the object, condition, or equipment by the

symbol. This also includes faces if indicated by a placard.

ANY ROOF SUPPORT INSTALLED BY THE TEAM

50

REFUGE ALTERNATIVE

A refuge alternative is considered to be an undamaged and

airtight unit equipped with an airlock. For contest work a refuge

alternative will be the prefabricated type and will not block

ventilation through an entry where the component is located or

prohibit exploration around the component.

The symbol “RA” may be located outside of the RA, the symbol

is to remain upright with door oriented as found. The only items

required to be mapped inside the Refuge Alternative are live

persons and bodies (orientation does not apply).

NOTE: Two maps will be provided to each team. The scale on

the maps will be 1 inch is equal to 10 feet.

51

SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS

Biomarine, BioPak 240-S Donning Procedures

A. Don Facepiece

1. Tighten lower straps simultaneously

2. Tighten temple straps simultaneously

3. Tighten forehead strap (if face piece has this strap)

B. Simulate the inhalation valve check by verbally stating:

“I am using my hand to block the inhalation port of the face piece and inhaling. There are no leaks present. I am removing the hose cap and reconnecting the inhalation hose to the face piece”. (This can be stated by the captain.) OR with neoprene hoses, grasp inhalation hose and inhale.

C. Perform exhalation valve test

1. Grasp exhalation hose and exhale

D. Open oxygen bottle valve full counter clockwise and then turn back 1/4 turn

52

Biomarine, BioPak 240 Revolution Donning Procedures

A. Don Facepiece

1. Tighten lower straps simultaneously

2. Tighten temple straps simultaneously

3. Tighten forehead strap (if face piece has this strap)

B. Open oxygen cylinder valve by turning counter clockwise until the valve stops

C. Perform exhalation valve test

1. Grasp inhalation hose and inhale

D. Perform inhalation valve test

1. Grasp exhalation hose and exhale

E. Depress the emergency bypass valve to verify proper operation

Draeger BG-4 Self Contained Breathing Apparatus

A. Procedures for getting under oxygen:

1. Put on facepiece properly and tighten straps. Open cylinder valve fully, then close one-half turn.

2. Observe the Monitron or Sentinel Pressure Gauge and Warning Module:

(a) Green indicator light - Apparatus O.K.

(b) Red Indicator light - Apparatus faulty

(c) PSI Reading

3. Tightly squeeze both breathing hoses and breathe in until a vacuum is produced. Hold your breath for an instant; the vacuum must be maintained, otherwise the straps on the mask must be tightened.

4. Check gauge and operation, straps, etc., prior to leaving fresh-air base.

53

CAREvent® DRA Automatic Rescue Ventilator

A. Procedures for getting under oxygen:

1. Bring mask close to face, check cylinder pressure and open cylinder valve. Face mask straps may be placed over the head and the mask allowed to hang loosely prior to opening cylinder valve. This will suffice for bringing the mask close to the face.

2. Put on facepiece properly and tighten straps; observe gauge.

3. Check gauge and operation, straps, etc.

4. Check cylinder pressure every five (5) minutes.

Note: CAREvent® DRA cylinder and regulator must be transported and used in a protective case to prevent damage.

54

DETECTING INSTRUMENTS

CMX 270 Continuous Carbon Monoxide, Methane, and Oxygen Monitor

A. Checking instrument:

1. Turn unit on by backing off knurled knob and inverting calibration cover. Tighten knurled knob. (Do this prior to starting the clock for the working of the Contest problem.) Visually inspect the digital display.

2. In the battery failure mode, the liquid crystal display (LCD) becomes blank

except for the numeral "1" and the word "LOBAT", and the audible alarm sounds a continuous tone. Approximately one-half hour before this condition, the audible alarm begins to beep periodically.

3. If the instrument's methane sensor should malfunction, the monitor will go

into a failure mode similar to the low battery failure mode. The word "FAULT" will appear in the lower left corner of this display, and the audible alarm will sound a continuous tone.

B. Tests for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated, the CMX 270 detects and measures concentrations of carbon monoxide, methane, and oxygen in ambient air continuously and simultaneously. Also, when activated, the instrument will automatically reveal the oxygen content on the digital LCD. Since the Contest rules require the oxygen deficiency tests to be made last, the instrument should be put into a different readout mode before tests at the gas box are made.

2. All gas measurements are revealed in the digital LCD. The type of readout

desired is selected by activating one of three touch type switches on the front of the case.

3. Carbon monoxide is measured and displayed in parts per million (ppm),

methane is percent by volume, and oxygen is percent by volume

55

MSA Passport Personal Alarm

A. Checking instrument:

1. Turn the instrument on by pressing the On/Off button on the control face panel. (Battery pack should be secured to instrument prior to starting the clock for working of the contest problem.) Visually inspect the digital display after it stabilizes.

2. Check the battery condition by pressing the page button. Battery condition and voltage will be displayed. BATT appears in the exposure display, alarm lights flash, and alarm sounds. After initial LOW warning, (instrument will function for only approximately 30 minutes more). The alarm sounds every five minutes until power is turned off or the battery condition is at VERY LOW level. Very low battery is no longer able to operate the instrument and unit shuts down automatically.

3. Visually check instrument for damage.

B. Testing for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated, MSA Passport detects and measures concentration of carbon monoxide, methane and oxygen in the ambient air continuously and simultaneously.

2. All gas measurements are revealed in the digital liquid crystal display (LCD)

and all are displayed simultaneously.

3. Carbon monoxide is measured and displayed in parts per million (ppm), methane and oxygen are displayed in percent by volume.

56

LTX 310 Multi-Gas Monitor

A. Checking instrument:

1. Turn the instrument on by pressing the On/Off button on the control face panel. The HOLD screen appears and the instrument sounds a beep approximately once a second. Continue holding the On/Off key until the RELEASE screen appears.

2. The following start-up screens will be displayed. DISPLAY TEST - All segments of the display are activated to verify proper operation.

BATTERY TEST - The battery charge condition is displayed as either

NORMAL (at least eight hours of operation) or LOW (there may not be sufficient charge to operate the instrument for eight hours).

SENSOR CONFIGURATION - Displays the types of installed sensors.

3. Visually check instrument for damage. Visually inspect the digital display after it stabilizes.

B. Testing for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated, LTX 310 detects and measures concentrations of carbon monoxide, methane and oxygen in the ambient air continuously and simultaneously.

2. All gas measurements are revealed in the digital liquid crystal display (LCD)

and all are displayed simultaneously.

3. Carbon monoxide is measured and displayed in parts per million (ppm), methane and oxygen are displayed in percent by volume.

57

TMX 410 Multi-Gas Monitor

A. Checking instrument:

1. Turn the instrument on by loosening the finger nut at the base and rotate the calibration cover. Rock On/Off switch to the left. The four LED's will flash once and the instrument will emit a short beep.

2. The following start-up screens will be displayed.

DISPLAY TEST - All segments of the display are activated to verify proper operation.

BATTERY TEST - If the battery is not fully charged, the voltage reading will

blink. When there is insufficient charge for the instrument to function

properly, the display will read BATTERY FAIL (Instrument cannot be used).

SENSOR CONFIGURATION - Displays the types of installed sensors.

CODE - Normal startup continues without any operator response.

3. Visually check instrument for damage. Visually inspect the digital display after it stabilizes.

B. Testing for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated, TMX 410 detects and measures concentrations of carbon monoxide, methane and oxygen in the ambient air continuously and simultaneously.

2. All gas measurements are revealed in the digital LCD and all are displayed

simultaneously.

3. Carbon monoxide is measured and displayed in parts per million (ppm),

methane and oxygen are displayed in percent by volume.

58

TMX 412 and ATX 620 Multi-Gas Monitors

A. Checking instrument:

1. Turn the instrument on by pressing and holding the mode button on the bottom of the instrument for 5 beeps.

2. The following start-up screens will be displayed.

DISPLAY TEST - All segments of the display are activated to verify proper operation.

BATTERY TEST - If the battery is not fully charged, the voltage reading will blink. When there is insufficient charge for the instrument to function properly, the display will read BATTERY FAIL (Instrument cannot be used).

SENSOR CONFIGURATION - Displays the types of installed sensors.

CODE - Normal startup continues without any operator response.

3. Visually check instrument for damage. Visually inspect the digital display after it stabilizes.

B. Testing for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated, TMX 412 and ATX 620 detect and measure concentrations of carbon monoxide, methane and oxygen in the ambient air continuously and simultaneously.

2. All gas measurements are revealed in the digital LCD and all are displayed simultaneously.

3. Carbon monoxide is measured and displayed in parts per million (ppm),

methane and oxygen are displayed in percent by volume.

59

CSE Explorer 4 Multi-Gas Monitor

A. Checking instrument:

1. Turn the instrument on by pressing either key on the side of the instrument. The main menu will appear on the display.

2. Press the right key to select the main operate display. All installed gas sensors will be displayed.

3. Press the left key to display the battery charge condition.

4. Visually check the instrument for damage. Visually inspect the digital

display after it stabilizes.

B. Testing for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated, Explorer 4 detects and measures concentrations of carbon monoxide, methane and oxygen in the ambient air continuously and simultaneously.

2. All gas measurements are revealed on the digital display and all are displayed simultaneously.

3. Carbon monoxide is measured and displayed in parts per million (ppm),

methane and oxygen are measured and displayed in percent by volume.

60

ITX Multi-Gas Monitor

A. Checking instrument:

1. Turn the instrument on by pressing the ON/OFF button on the control face panel for one beep. “Warm up” appears on the LCD.

2. Zero – Press (on/off mode) until “zero sensors” appears. Press “E” to start zeroing.

3. Peaks – Press (on/off mode) to view peaks. Press (E) to reset peaks.

Following start-up screen will display:

Sensor configuration – Displays the types of installed sensors.

Display test – All segments of the display are activated to verify proper operation.

Battery test. A battery status indicator is shown in the center of the display. As the instrument battery life is reduced, the shaded area of the battery indicator will clear until the instrument reaches the low battery condition. (24 hr. usage with full charge)

Visually check instrument for damage.

B. Testing for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated, ITX detects and measures concentrations of carbon

monoxide, methane and oxygen in the ambient air continuously and simultaneously.

4. All gas measurements are revealed in the digital liquid crystal display (LCD) and all are displayed simultaneously.

5. Carbon monoxide is measured and displayed in parts per million (ppm), methane and oxygen are measured and displayed in percent by volume.

61

MSA Solaris

A. Checking Instrument:

1. Turn the instrument on by pressing on/off button on the side of the instrument.

2. The following start-up screens will be displayed.

SELF TEST – All segments display, audible alarm sounds, alarm lights illuminate, vibrator activates, software version displays, along with internal diagnostics

ALARM SETPOINTS – Low, High, STEL(if activated), and TWA(if activated)

CALIBRATION GAS – Expected calibration gas values

TIME AND DATE - If data logging option installed

LAST CAL DATE - If data logging option installed

CAL DUE DATE - If data logging option installed

INSTRUMENT WARM-UP PERIOD

FRESH AIR SETUP OPTION

3. Visually check instrument for damage. Visually inspect the digital display after it stabilizes.

B. Testing for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated, MSA Solaris detects and measures concentrations of carbon monoxide, methane, and oxygen in the ambient air continuously and simultaneously.

2. All gas measurements are revealed in the digital liquid crystal display (LCD) and all are displayed simultaneously.

Carbon monoxide is measured and displayed in parts per million (ppm),

methane and oxygen are displayed in percent by volume.

62

MSA ALTAIR 4X Multi-gas Detector

A. Checking Instrument

1. Turn the instrument on by pressing the ON/OFF button located in the

center of the instrument.

2. The instrument preforms a self-test.

All display segments are activated

Audible alarm sounds

Alarm LEDs light

Vibrating alarm is activated

3. Visually check the instrument for damage. Visually inspect the digital

display after it stabilizes.

B. Testing for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated, MSA Solaris detects and measures concentrations of

carbon monoxide, methane, and oxygen in the ambient air continuously

and simultaneously.

2. All gas measurements are revealed in the digital liquid crystal display

(LCD) and all are displayed simultaneously.

3. Toxic gases such as carbon monoxide are measured and displayed in parts

per million (ppm), methane and oxygen are displayed in percent by

volume.

63

M40M Multi-Gas Monitor

A. Checking instrument:

1. Turn the instrument on by pressing the power button on the control face panel for one beep. This is the second button from the left and is the international symbol for power with a circle with a slash at the 12 o’clock position.

2. Zero – Press the up arrow (^) button once and “0” appears. Press the “Enter” button to start the zero process. This enter button is the third button from the left and is the international symbol for enter that is composed of a left descending arrow.

3. Peaks – Press the up arrow button (^) twice to view peaks. While viewing the peak readings press “Enter” to clear.

Following start-up screen, all the segments of the display illuminate to verify proper operation. This is followed by the software revision number. This in turn is followed by a 20 second count down timer. All installed sensors will then display.

A battery status indicator is shown in the lower left corner of the display. As the instrument battery life is reduced, the shaded area of the battery indicator will clear until the instrument reaches the low battery condition. (18 hr. usage with full charge)

Visually check instrument for damage.

B. Testing for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated the M40M detects and measures concentrations of carbon monoxide, methane and oxygen in the ambient air continuously and simultaneously.

2. All gas measurements are revealed in the digital liquid crystal display (LCD)

and all are displayed simultaneously.

3. Carbon monoxide is measured and displayed in parts per million (ppm), methane and oxygen are measured and displayed in percent by volume.

64

MX4 and MX6 iBrid Multi-Gas Monitors

A. Checking instrument:

1. Turn the instrument on by pressing and holding the center [Enter] navigation button on the lower front of the instrument for at least 3 seconds.

2. After power up, a series of startup screens are displayed on the LCD.

STARTUP SELF TEST – Depending on configuration, startup screens may be displayed.

NORMAL OPERATION MODE – The types and readings of all installed sensors are displayed.

BATTERY STATUS – Under the main menu [VIEW] option, select [BATTERY] to view the battery status.

3. Visually check instrument for damage. Visually inspect the LCD display after it stabilizes.

B. Testing for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated, instrument detects and measures concentration of carbon

monoxide, methane and oxygen in the ambient air continuously and simultaneously.

2. All gas measurements are revealed on the LCD and all are displayed

simultaneously.

Carbon monoxide is measured and displayed in parts per million (ppm), methane and

oxygen are displayed in percent by volume.

65

Drager X-am 2000 and Drager X-am 5000 Multi Gas Detectors

A. Checking instrument:

Switching on the device:

Press and hold the [OK] key for approximately 3 seconds until the countdown shown on the display has expired.

- All the display segments, including the visual, audible and vibration alarms, are activated for a short time.

- The device performs a self-test.

- The remaining operating time is displayed. Note: (battery status)

- All alarm set points are displayed in succession.

Check that the gas inlet opening on the device is not covered.

Visually check instrument for damage. Visually inspect the digital display after it stabilizes.

B. Testing for carbon monoxide/methane/oxygen:

1. When activated, Drager X-am 2000 and Drager X-am 5000 detects and measures concentrations of carbon monoxide, methane and oxygen in the ambient air continuously and simultaneously.

2. All gas measurements are revealed in the digital LCD and all are displayed

simultaneously.

66

2018 STATEMENTS OF FACT

MINE RESCUE

1. To test for methane, use a methane detector or chemical analysis.

2. Carbon monoxide can be detected by means of carbon monoxide detectors, multi- gas detectors, or by chemical analysis.

3. Nitrogen dioxide is produced by burning and by the detonation of explosives.

4. A mixture of coal dust in air reduces the explosive limit of methane.

5. One and one-half to two percent methane together with coal dust in air may be explosive.

6. Mines below the water table tend to have more methane than those above the

water table.

7. After a fire or explosion in a mine, rescue teams are usually needed to go into the mine to assess and re-establish ventilation.

8. The range of concentrations within which a gas will explode are known as its “explosive range”.

9. Any flammable gas can explode under certain conditions.

10. Indirect firefighting methods allow firefighters to remain a safe distance from the fire.

11. Temporary seals are built before permanent seals are erected in order to seal off a

fire area as quickly as possible.

12. In mines where head coal (roof coal) is left, a fire will spread more rapidly.

13. One hazard of heat during a fire is that it tends to weaken the roof, especially where head coal is left.

14. Fires can be attacked by the use of a foam generator from a distance of 500-1,500

feet.

15. It is generally recommended that teams not travel through foam filled areas. 16. One method of indirect firefighting is flooding the sealed fire area with water.

67

17. Once an explosion has occurred, there is always the possibility of further explosions.

18. Mine rescue teams may find it necessary to use line brattice to sweep noxious or

explosive gases from a face area.

19. Once ventilation has been re-established and fresh air advanced, non-apparatus crews can take over the rehabilitation and cleanup effort.

20. Rescue teams are responsible for assessing damage to the ventilation system.

21. Information the team relays to the fresh-air base as it proceeds is known as the “progress report”.

22. It is the responsibility of rescue team members to have all the information needed

to do the work.

23. When a team locates a body, its location and position should be marked on a mine map and on the roof or rib close to the body.

24. The rescue team captain should regulate the team’s pace according to conditions

encountered.

25. When a body is first located, every effort should be made not to disturb any possible evidence in the area.

26. In situations too hazardous for teams to explore and reventilate safely, teams may

be instructed to seal the area.

27. New mine rescue team members must have at least 20 hours of instruction on the breathing apparatus used by the team.

28. Before the team leaves the fresh-air base to travel inby, the captain should take

note of the time of departure.

29. It is recommended that team checks be conducted every 15 to 20 minutes.

30. It is recommended that the first stop for a team check be just inby the fresh-air base.

31. Teams should report the lowest team member’s oxygen gauge reading at each team

check.

68

32. “Tying in” is the process by which you systematically explore all crosscuts and adjacent areas as you advance.

33. As the team advances underground, the captain takes the lead.

34. It is important that the team pace its work so that it can return to the fresh air base on time.

35. As the team advances, the map man records what the team encounters by

marking the information on a mine map.

36. The team is responsible for choosing the exact sites within headings for building seals.

37. Smoke causes a lack of orientation which may cause a team member to lose

his/her sense of balance.

38. Class B fires involve flammable or combustible liquids.

39. Class D fires involve combustible metals.

40. Before using a hand held extinguisher it must be checked for the type of fire you are fighting.

41. Solubility is the ability of a gas to be dissolved in water.

42. Pools of water can release water soluble gases into the air when they are stirred

up.

43. High expansion foam is light and resilient and can travel long distances to a fire without breaking down.

44. Low expansion foam is very wet and heavy and can only be used when you’re close enough to a fire to force the foam directly onto the fire.

45. Carbon monoxide is explosive.

46. Oxygen is a supporter of combustion.

69

47. If smoke is so dense as to make visibility poor, you may need to keep in constant physical contact with an object or a rib in order to feel your way along.

48. Two types of fire cannot be fought directly, fuel rich and spon com (spontaneous

combustion).

49. Team safety must not be compromised.

50. Monitoring pressures and gases helps determine the effectiveness of firefighting and the potential danger of an explosion.

51. Sulfur dioxide and hydrogen sulfide are water soluble gases.

52. Color, odor, and taste are physical properties that help to identify gases during barefaced exploration.

53. Only detectors and chemical analysis can positively identify a gas.

54. The effects of toxic gases depend on the concentration, toxicity, and exposure time.

55. Asphyxiates are gases which cause suffocation or choking.

56. Firedamp is a mixture of methane in air that will burn or explode when ignited.

57. If there is a sufficient amount of hydrocarbons in smoke, the smoke may be explosive.

58. Ventilation controls are used underground to properly distribute air to all

sections of the mine.

59. Gases with specific gravities less than 1.0 tend to seek high places.

60. Gases with specific gravities greater than 1.0 tend to seek low places.

61. In order to maintain an airlock, one door of the airlock must be kept closed while the other is opened.

70

62. Rescue teams should build an airlock so that the two stoppings are erected as close together as possible yet with enough space to allow room for the team and their equipment to fit in between.

63. If the fresh air base is underground, it should be located where it’s assured a fresh

air travelway to the surface.

64. The fresh air base should be located where it’s assured positive ventilation and fresh air.

65. Elevators should be tested before use following a disaster.

66. As a team advances, it is important to stay in close contact with the fresh air base/command center.

67. Methane is lighter than air.

68. Normal air has a specific gravity of one.

69. Sufficient time should be allowed for a fire area to cool before it is unsealed.

70. Team captains should inspect roof and ribs before the team members advance into the area.

71. The roof and ribs should be tested before extinguishing a fire.

72. Hazardous areas should be marked to warn other teams that may enter the area after yours.

73. Progress reports should include reports on roof and rib conditions and gas

conditions.

74. The time spent under oxygen by a rescue team is usually limited to two hours or less.

75. When looking for survivors, it is important to both look and listen for clues.

76. For a Class C fire (electrical), if power has been cut off to the burning equipment, it may be treated as a Class A or B fire.

77. When survivors are located, their location, identities, and condition should be

reported immediately to the command center.

71

78. When survivors are located, the location, time, and date should be marked on the team’s map and on the rib where they are found.

79. When survivors are located, they should be transported to safety and fresh air as

quickly as possible.

80. The main objective of recovery work is to put the affected area of the mine back in operation as soon as possible.

81. All temporary seals should be well hitched in the floor roof, and ribs to improve

their strength.

82. Urethane foam is an effective sealant when used around the perimeter of a seal.

83. High volatile coal burns much faster than low or medium volatile coal.

84. It may be necessary to double or triple the thickness of the material in order to improve the effectiveness of a temporary seal.

85. Seals should be built at locations with good roof and even roof and ribs.

86. Rescue Teams may encounter many hazards while fighting fires directly by hand.

87. When fires are sealed in gassy or dusty mines, a thick coating of rock dust should

be applied to the ribs, roof and floor for several hundred feet outby the seals.

88. The main objectives of exploration work during a mine fire are locating the fire and assessing conditions in the fire area.

89. A self-contained breathing apparatus is a completely portable unit that supplies

oxygen or air independently of the surrounding atmosphere.

90. A smoke tube is used to show the direction and velocity of slow moving air.

91. If a team member must return to the fresh air base because of a problem, it is standard practice among teams for the entire team to go back with that person.

72

92. Thermal imaging cameras should only be used in less than 1 percent of Methane.

93. Once rescued, survivors should never be left alone.

94. The lower explosive limit of hydrogen is 4.0 percent.

95. The IDLH of Nitrogen Dioxide is 20 ppm.

96. Clean, dry air at sea level is made up of 78 percent nitrogen and 21 percent oxygen.

97. After a fire has been sealed, it is recommended to wait 72 hours before making

the initial visit to the seals.

98. When appropriate, a fire area is not un-sealed until the oxygen content is low enough to make explosions impossible and the carbon monoxide has disappeared.

99. Firefighters force inert gases into areas where they are trying to remove the

oxygen leg of the fire triangle.

100. A team is a unit made up of individuals working toward a common goal.

SECTION II

2018

FIRST AID

RULES

Revised: 04/18/2018

20178 FIRST AID CONTEST RULES

INDEX

Section II Title Page

Rules Governing the 20178 First Aid Contest ...................................................................... 1 Scorecard A Discounts ............................................................................................................ 8 Interpretations of Scorecard B (Artificial Ventilation/Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation). ........................................................................................................................ 12

Skill Sheets Initial Assessment .................................................................................................................. 16 Patient Assessment ................................................................................................................ 17 One-Person CPR (Manikin Only) ........................................................................................ 19 Two-Rescuer CPR (Manikin Only) ...................................................................................... 21 Mouth-to-Mask Resuscitation .............................................................................................. 27 Airway Obstruction ............................................................................................................... 28 Sucking Chest Wound ........................................................................................................... 30 Life Threatening Bleeding..................................................................................................... 31 Tourniquet............................................................................................................................... 32 Dressings and Bandaging – Open Wounds ....................................................................... 33 Two-Person Log Roll ............................................................................................................. 35 Three-Person Log Roll…………………………………………………………………….. 38 Splinting .................................................................................................................................. 36 One Rescuer Blanket Drag .................................................................................................... 44 Ground Lifts ............................................................................................................................ 45 Shirt Drag ................................................................................................................................ 46 Establishing Airway – Suspected Cervical Spine (Neck) Injury ..................................... 47 Shock ........................................................................................................................................ 48 Immobilization ....................................................................................................................... 49 Burns ........................................................................................................................................ 51 Frostbite ................................................................................................................................... 52 Late or Deep Cold Injury ...................................................................................................... 53 Hyperthermia ......................................................................................................................... 54 First Aid Statements of Fact .................................................................................................. 56 First Aid Statements of Fact – Answer Key ........................................................................ 75

1

RULES GOVERNING THE 20178 NATIONAL FIRST AID CONTEST First Aid rules were designed as a training tool for first aid teams. They were developed for contest purposes only. Discretion should be used in actual mine emergency situations. 1. All First-Aid Problems will be sent to either the Chief/Assistant Chief Judge of

First-Aid for review and approval.

2. Members of First Aid Teams must be composed of persons who are bona fide employees of the mining industry companies or persons who are designated or contracted by mining companies. Teams shall furnish their own recording manikin, (provided with the equipment to print out the results of CPR/AV) and all other materials listed in section C. Miscellaneous below.

3. A team shall consist of two members and a patient. A team shall not use the same

patient for multiple teams. Bystander(s) may only assist in supporting, lifting, or moving the patient. If the problem requires a bystander(s), they will be provided. Bystander(s) will be positioned at the field and will be identified as a bystander with labels or name tags and Body Substance Isolation (BSI) precautions will be in place. If a patient is used as a bystander, teams must provide BSI precautions prior to patient contact. Each team shall work one first aid problem and the score shall determine the team’s final standings.

4. Each team entering the contest will draw a number to determine the order of the

performance at the time of registration. 5. Each participating team must be under guard before the start of the contest. Any

team or team member receiving information concerning a contest problem prior to arriving at the working area will be disqualified by the Chief Judge and Director.

6. No practicing will be allowed on the field before the beginning of the contest. No

reference books or training material will be permitted in the working area during the working or reading of the problems.

7. Only designated officials will be allowed to communicate with teams while teams

are working. 8. All procedures shall be performed in the order listed: Skill Sheets supersede First

Aid Rules which supersede Brady First Responder Ninth Tenth Edition by Bergeron and Le Baudour.

2

9. Contest officials will designate a space (15 feet by 15 feet minimum) for teams to work. All equipment and team members will be kept behind a baseline designated by a contest official. All problems will be worked in the designated area which shall contain only the judges, bystanders/patients and the contesting teams.

Team members not complying with this rule will be docked under Rule 18 on Scorecard A

10. The timekeepers shall explain to the team the timing devices used. Prior to

starting the timing devices Judges will require a sample CPR tape with a Judges will require a signature and team number on the sample CPR tape. (Check shallow breaths and shallow compressions).

11. Problems will be kept in unsealed envelopes, retained by the judges, and given to

the team after the timing device has been started. Judges shall place the patient in the required position as stated in the problem to be worked.

a. The working time for a problem will start when the team starts the timing

device. b. If props are to be utilized during the working of the problem, such props must

be readily available to the working teams and in working condition. These Props (except props used to simulate an injury) must be identified by the judges to the team members prior to starting the timing device and must be located within the designated working area. Props will not be utilized in lieu of first aid equipment for treatment of patient(s). Props will be limited to items related to communication and mechanism of injury for effects unless skill sheets are provided. Props shall be within the application of the skill sheets used for treatment of the injury/conditions. Props used to simulate an injury will not be identified to the team.

c. A barrier device must be used when contacting manikin. The face

masks/shields may be removed when the team is required to give artificial ventilation, CPR, inflating splints, etc.

12. Injuries/conditions requiring treatment will be identified by cards, envelopes or

labels attached to the patient at or as near the location of the injury as possible on the outside of the clothing, be identified by simulated wounds, or be in the reading of the problem. Signs, symptoms or mechanisms of injury may be used. If signs and symptoms are used, all signs and symptoms shall be identified by cards, envelopes or labels placed on patient. All signs and symptoms will be given to the teams in writing. Wounds that are listed in the reading of the problem shall also

3

be placed on patient. (Exception: If the wound is on the eyelid or an impaled object in the eye, the label will NOT be placed on the eye, but in an obvious area near the eye.)

During the initial or patient assessment, teams may find an envelope attached to

the patient(s) or be provided an envelope by the judges which contains patient information that needs immediate attention. If repositioning of patient(s) is required for treatment, patient(s) must be placed in the proper position prior to treatment. Upon completion of treatment of these conditions, the initial or patient assessment will be resumed at the point where team left off. The patient(s) will already be marked upon arrival of the team.

13. Lettering on the cards and/or labels will be at least 1/4-inch in height and all life

threatening conditions will be in red.

Example: 2-INCH WOUND ON FOREHEAD 14. The problem will end and teams will stop the timing device when all conditions

have been located, treated, and the work area has been cleaned. The timekeeper/judge must time the problem in minutes and seconds and consult with the team upon completion of the problem to verify the time.

15. After stopping the timing device, team members will remain with the patient(s)

until released by the judges. Any physical treatment(s) not performed, i.e. bandage, splint not correctly placed or utilized will be pointed out to team at this time.

16. The calculated time will be determined by contest officials by averaging the

working time of all teams participating in the contest (1 discount per 3 minute overtime or fraction thereof). When a time limit is utilized the average working time will not be in problems.

17. The accumulation of individual discounts within a procedure shall not exceed the discounts for failure to perform that procedure. (Example AV, CPR, etc.)

4

A. Written Examination 1. During isolation, contest officials will give the written exam to the two working

team members. The written examination will be ten statements of fact taken verbatim from the contest rules. Each statement shall contain a blank space which shall represent a key word, with no more than two consecutive blanks per statement. Answers will be multiple choice with three choices. Answers will not be intentionally misspelled. “None of the above” shall not be used as one of the choices. The answers will be multiple choice with four choices. Team members will select A, B, or C, or D by circling the complete answer.

Example:

1. As a member of the EMS team, your primary role is one of:

a. Patient care. b. Safety. c. Transport. d. Documentation.

A maximum of fifteen minutes will be allowed for the team members to take the test.

2. Team members taking the written examination will not be permitted to take any

written material or information into the testing area. 3. There will be no discussion during the time that written examinations are being

taken.

B. Ties In the event of ties in the contest, Scorecard A (First Aid Procedures and Critical Skills) discounts will be the first tie breaker, Scorecard B (AV/CPR) discounts will be the second tie breaker, written exam will be the third tie breaker and actual working time, in minutes and seconds, of the team will be the fourth tie breaker.

C. Miscellaneous

Teams will be notified by posting when they may review their score cards. Within one hour of posting, team members and trainer shall report to a designated location. Once notified, team members and the trainer shall have 20 minutes for reviewing the problem, the judge’s skill sheets and scorecards to prepare any protest. All protests

5

shall be in writing and shall state the discount in question, the scorecard involved, and their reference proof in the rule book or Brady book to support their protest or the protest will not be considered. All protests will be considered by the Final Appeals Committee. A decision by the Final Appeals Committee is binding and final. Protest sheets will be furnished to the teams by the judges for the recording of rules infractions or discounts assessed to teams. Judges shall remain available until released. MATERIALS LIST Participants will be required to furnish their own materials. Teams must provide the minimum equipment. Listed below is the minimum equipment required. Problems will be designed utilizing no more than the minimum material list. For contest purposes, all bandaging materials will be considered sterile. For contests purposes dressings need not be opened before use for treatment. 24 Triangular Bandages 6 Adhesive compresses 24 Sterile gauze, (4”x4”) and/or 4” Compresses 6 Roller Bandages 3 Blankets 1 Scissors, EMT Utility 6 Pairs of Examination Gloves 2 Mask/face shields or masks and goggles combination meeting blood borne pathogen requirements 2 Heat Pack - Simulated 4 Cold packs - Simulated 2 Oval Eye Pads 1 Pen and paper set 1 Elevating device 1 Recording manikin (with device to the print results of AV/CPR performed) 2 Barrier devices with one-way valve for performing AV/CPR 1 White bag (i.e. plastic garbage bag) 1 Compliment of splints (may be pre-padded but not assembled) 1 Long back board with straps (Aluminum, Wood, etc.) 2 Air splints (1 full arm and 1 full leg) 1 Packet Sugar/Tube Instant Glucose (for Diabetic Purposes) 1 Adhesive Tape 1 Burn Sheet, Sterile (40” x 80” minimum) 1 Rigid Extrication Collar 4 Trauma Dressings (minimum of 10” X 30”) 1 Eye Shield/Cup

6

1 Pen Light 4 Tourniquets 2 Towels 1 Pillow 4 Occlusive Dressing 2 Sticks, Wooden Dowels or equivalent 1 Watch/Timing Device 1 Headset (long spine board) 1 500 ml sterile water (for contest purposes expiration date not applicable) Compliment of Straps for Long Spine Board (buckle straps, spider straps, etc.) Automated External Defibrillator Training Unit Problem will be designed from the Skill Sheets approved by the Rules Committee. Teams will be required to triage the accident scene. Problem may have up to three patients at the scene. Manikins will be furnished by teams for performing procedures and critical skills pertaining to all ventilation problems, cardiac arrest problems. Signal boxes on manikins will be covered or positioned so that indicators will not be visible to the team. NOTE: Live patients will not be used in any CPR or ventilation problems. Under no circumstances will videotape recordings or photos be introduced as supplementary material for consideration of the appeal. Guidelines for skills sheet discounts: 1. The team is required to call for help/call 911, once during the working of the

problem. This statement must be made prior to starting triage. 2. Each critical skill identified with an asterisk (*) shall be clearly verbalized by the

team as it is being conducted. 3. After initially stating what DOTS stands for; Deformities, Open Wounds,

Tenderness, and Swelling, the team may simple state “DOTS” when making their

checks.

4. After initially stating what CSM stands for; Circulation, Sensation and Motor

Function, the team may simple state “CSM” when making their checks.

5. After initially stating what AVPU stands for; Alert, Verbal, Painful, Unresponsive,

the team may simply state “AVPU” when making their checks.

7

6. If an injury requires a back board, the team may continue to the next area to be treated once all injuries not requiring the backboard have been treated or treatment started.

7. The collar for a skull fracture and/or brain injuries, will be applied after the neck

has been examined and treatment completed if required. 8. Except for slings required for treatment for fractures or dislocation, slings may be

applied anytime during the working of the problem prior to stopping clock. (This includes slings for fractured ribs). Factory or Triangular slings may be used. No sling required when using a full arm splint, arm should be secured to the body.

9. For injuries requiring splinting, any acceptable splint may be used. Factory splints,

wooden splints, air splints, sam splints, etc. 10. Prior to stopping the clock, the team must reassess the patient’s level of

consciousness, respiratory status and patient response. 11. Teams must make statement to judge, “Removing clothing; exposing and cleaning

wound surface(s)”. This statement is only required to be made once during the working of the problem, prior to treating first wound.

12. Rapid Assessment consists of Initial Assessment and Patient Assessment.

13. If the Rapid Assessment has been performed, all life threatening injuries are treated,

and transportation is delayed the detailed patient assessment will be performed and will consist only of the procedures (no critical skills on patient assessment) with treating all injuries when found.

Table 26.2 Information for this table taken from Chart figure 27.5– Start Triage System

IMMEDIATE DELAYED MINOR DECEASED

Respirations >30 per minute <30 per minute <30 per minute Absent

Perfusion

Capillary refill >2 seconds or radial pulse

absent

Capillary refill <2 seconds or radial pulse

present

Capillary refill <2 seconds or radial pulse

present

Absent

8

Mental Status Unable to

follow commands

Able to follow commands

Able to follow commands (Can Walk)

Absent

Table Reference: Emergency Medical Responder, ninth Tenth edition by Le Baudour and Bergeron Immediate

Teams will systematically conduct initial assessment, treating all life-threatening injuries/conditions. When one or more of the conditions listed in rule 26 is encountered the team will perform a rapid patient assessment according to the patient assessment skill sheet. To perform a rapid patient assessment, teams will examine each area of the body in its entirety, verbalizing critical skills and injuries/conditions found. No treatment is required for non-life-threatening conditions/injuries found during the rapid patient assessment. After completing rapid assessment and treating life threatening conditions, if transportation is delayed patient treatment will continue until transportation is available. A detailed patient assessment would be required, treating conditions/injuries as found. Straps may be released as necessary. Support would have to be taken as required. Team will re-strap and transport when transportation is available or treatment completed. Patient is then prepared for transport and/or transported as required by written problem. To prepare for transportation, a team will be required to properly place and secure a patient on a backboard as outlined in the skill sheets, cover with a blanket and lift patient from the floor. After the patient has been lifted from the floor, the team will verbalize – “transporting patient”.

Delayed

Teams will systematically conduct the patient assessment according to procedures of the patient assessment skill sheet. Each area of the body shall be examined in its entirety prior to treating injuries in that area (except taking support). All injuries must be treated on the area being examined prior to moving to the next area to be examined. The sling for fractured ribs may be applied after upper extremity has been surveyed/treated. If treatment has been started and can be completed by one team member (except injuries requiring a backboard), the other team member may continue the examination to the next area and begin treatment. (Systemically, legs are treated before the arms.)

9

Minor Teams will systematically conduct the patient assessment according to procedures of the patient assessment skill sheet. Each area of the body shall be examined in its entirety prior to treating injuries in that area (except taking support). All injuries must be treated on the area being examined prior to moving to the next area to be examined. The sling for fractured ribs may be applied after upper extremity has been surveyed/treated. If treatment has been started and can be completed by one team member (except injuries requiring a backboard), the other team member may continue the examination to the next area and begin treatment. (Systemically, legs are treated before the arms.) DECEASED: Once the determination that a patient is deceased the team will be required to cover the patient before stopping the timing device(s).

SCORECARD A DISCOUNTS 1. Violations of general rules not covered on scorecards. 5 each infraction 2. All life-threatening conditions shall be located and started before patient

assessment can begin. ___ 20 Life threatening conditions will be considered a patient having any one or more of

the following conditions: breathing difficulties, no pulse, spinal injury, skull fracture, a sucking chest wound or life threatening bleeding)

Patient assessment can begin after all life-threatening conditions have been located

and treatment started. Environmental and Medical Emergencies can be treated anytime during the working of the problem after initial assessment.

3. When the team encounters life-threatening bleeding, no work other than

controlling bleeding shall be done until bleeding is controlled. Bleeding is controlled when notified by the Judge (judge makes a statement that bleeding is controlled). If treatment has been started and one team member can complete that treatment, the other team member may continue to work. 10 each infraction

4. During the course of the problem, teams may encounter a card, envelope or label

stating various conditions. Upon completion of treatment of these conditions, resume patient assessment at the point where team left off._______5 each infraction

10

5. Patient cannot talk, direct, or assist unless stated in the problem. (Reactionary or unintentional movements by the patient should not be discounted) 5 each infraction

6. The bystander/patient must be shown the correct method of support. 2 The bystander must be shown the correct method of support and maintaining the

open airway by a team member or members any time during the working of the problem, but before taking support.

7. No practicing will be allowed on the field before the beginning of the contest. No

reference books or training material will be permitted in the working area during the working or reading of the problems. ____ 5

8. All team members and patient shall be dressed similarly. Shoes need not be

identical. The patient may wear shorts even if the team members are wearing pants. The pants and shorts shall be the same color. ____ 1

9. The team’s material and equipment (jump kits, splints, etc.) may not be assembled

or donned (excluding BSI) until after the timing device is started. The manikin may be placed in the designated area prior to starting the timing device. ___ 5

10. Handling of a patient by a team or team member in such a manner that could compromise condition of the patient. (Examples: Mishandling extremities, stepping across patient, etc.) (Straddling is only acceptable for patient loading.) ____5 each infraction

11. All injuries and/or conditions shall be treated (example: wound, fracture,

frostbite). 20 each infraction 12. Preassembly of material. 5 13. Failure to perform a required critical skill. Each CRITICAL SKILL shall be

performed as identified on the skill sheets. 2 each infraction (except for CPR/AV covered by scorecard B)

14. During patient assessment, failure to verbally state the location physically

examined and each condition found. 1 each infraction 15. Working out of order (assessment, procedure, critical skill). 2

11

Delayed Teams will systematically conduct the patient assessment according to procedures of the patient assessment skill sheet. Each area of the body shall be examined in its entirety prior to treating injuries in that area (except taking support). All injuries must be treated on the area being examined prior to moving to the next area to be examined. The sling for fractured ribs may be applied after upper extremity has been surveyed/treated. If treatment has been started and can be completed by one team member (except injuries requiring a backboard), the other team member may continue the examination to the next area and begin treatment. (Systemically, legs are treated before the arms.) Immediate Teams will systematically conduct initial assessment, treating all life-threatening injuries/conditions. When one or more of the conditions listed in rule 26 is encountered the team will perform a rapid patient assessment according to the patient assessment skill sheet. To perform a rapid patient assessment, teams will examine each area of the body in its entirety, verbalizing critical skills and injuries/conditions found. No treatment is required for non-life-threatening conditions/injuries found during the rapid patient assessment. After completing rapid assessment and treating life threatening conditions, if transportation is delayed patient treatment will continue until transportation is available. A detailed patient assessment would be required, treating conditions/injuries as found. Straps may be released as necessary. Support would have to be taken as required. Team will re-strap and transport when transportation is available or treatment completed. Patient is then prepared for transport and/or transported as required by written problem. To prepare for transportation, a team will be required to properly place and secure a patient on a backboard as outlined in the skill sheets, cover with a blanket and lift patient from the floor. After the patient has been lifted from the floor, the team will verbalize – “transporting patient”.

16. Failure to follow written instructions.____5 17. Teams shall not pad around the head and neck of the patient, for a suspected

spinal injury, before the patient is placed onto the backboard. 1 18. All material shall be placed behind baseline prior to stopping the timing device.

After completing the problem the work area shall be cleaned of ALL material, including the infectious waste, which shall be placed in a white trash bag provided by the team. When all materials have been placed behind baseline, a team member

12

shall stop the timing device. The judges and First Aid team will verify the working time upon completion of the problem. 1

19. Protective equipment must be donned prior to patient(s) contact (gloves, masks,

and eye protection - eyeglasses are acceptable). Only BSI may be donned prior to starting the timing device. ____5 each infraction

20. Gloves shall be changed if there would be contamination because of a glove tear or

due to other contamination (such as contacting multiple patients.) 2 each infraction

21. The broken-back board splint may be preassembled and padded. Other splints

may be pre-padded but not assembled. (Cravat bandages cannot be preassembled on the back board, except for tying padding.) 5

22. Failure to take support of a fracture or dislocation (not supporting fracture or

dislocation).______10

Support of Extremities – Above and below the fracture or dislocation

Support of Hip – Both sides of the fracture or dislocation

Support for spinal injury – Stabilization of neck/Modified Jaw Thrust except for analyzing and shocking with AED patient during CPR

Support for skull fracture – Stabilization of neck/Modified Jaw Thrust

No support for fractured ribs,

No support of fractures/dislocations of nose, jaw, fingers, and toes 23. Support of fractures and/or dislocations shall not be broken or released. (except

during the use of an AED when shock is delivered) 5 When changing support, if support is broken, this discount applies. Change of

support can be done as many times as the team desires provided the support is not broken.

Support for upper extremity fractures/dislocations shall be maintained until the

sling and swathe are completed. Discount if support of fracture and/or dislocation is released by support person before sling is completed.

Sling and swath not required with air splints. 24. Fractures/dislocations shall be supported prior to bandaging injuries. Once the

extremity has been assessed, fractures/dislocations must be supported prior to bandaging injuries on the extremity. 5

13

During initial and patient assessment, teams must physically support/stabilize fractures and dislocations that require support as they are found. When the fracture/dislocation is on an extremity and support has been taken, the team must complete the examination on the extremity treating other injures prior to splinting the fracture/dislocation.

25. Not applying sling for upper extremity wound. 1 Triangular slings are required for all wounds of upper extremities, including

shoulder and armpit wounds. Slings will not be required for upper extremity burns/deep cold injuries. However, if a burn/deep cold injury and wound and/or fracture/dislocation are present on the same upper extremity, a sling shall be applied.

26. Failure to determine immediate patients._____10 An immediate patient shall be transported immediately (if transportation is

available). This presents a load and go situation. Immediate conditions are:

Respirations: >30 respirations per minute Perfusion: Capillary refill > 2 seconds or radial pulse absent Mental Status: Unable to follow commands. Any one or more of the above

conditions must be clearly visible on the patients.

27. Failure to start timing device. __ 2 discounts

28. Each incorrect answer on written examination __1 discount

14

INTERPRETATIONS OF SCORECARD B ARTIFICIAL VENTILATION/CARDIOPULMONARY RESUSCITATION

1. Failure to determine unresponsiveness (according to Critical Skill Sheet). 1 2. Failure to call for help. 1 3. Failure to open airway. 1 4. Failure to use proper maneuver to open airway (using head-tilt/chin-lift

maneuver when jaw-thrust should be used, vice versa). 1 5. Failure to assess breathlessness within 10 seconds. 1 6. Failure to use one-way valve barrier device when ventilating manikin. 1 7. Failure to state “get AED”. 1 8. Failure to use mouth-to-nose ventilation when required. 1 9. Failure to keep body and head in line, if spinal injury exists. 1 10. Failure to use tongue jaw lift, cross-finger technique, or finger sweep when

required. 1 11. Failure to reposition head when airway obstruction is suspected. 1 12. Failure to give chest compressions when required. (airway obstruction skill sheet)

____1 13. Failure to check pulse prior to giving compressions. 1 14. Failure to assess pulse for 5-10 seconds. 1 15. Failure to correctly locate the carotid pulse. 1 16. Failure to verbalize absence of pulse. 1

17. Delivery of simulated shock with AED to patient while in contact with the patient

___5 each occurrence

15

18. Failure of the printing device to print the results of artificial ventilations given._____10

Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation

1. Failure to give AV/CPR when required. 20 (Maximum of 3 sets AV/CPR or combination thereof) 2. Failure to locate landmark for giving compressions. 1 3. Failure to make parallel axis with heels of hands. 1 4. Allowing fingers to rest on chest. 1 5. Compressions. Discounts shall apply to each set.

a) Timing. 30 compressions shall be delivered within 18 seconds. 1 b) Depth. Compression depth shall break the first line for 60 pounds pressure.

Over compressions shall not be discounted. 1 c) Number required. A total of 30 compressions shall be made each cycle. 1 d) Release of upstroke. The release line shall be straight. 1 e) Rate. Compressions shall be made at the rate of (at least) 100 to 120 per

minute.__1 6. Failure to maintain hand contact with manikin when releasing pressure during

compressions. 1 (This does not apply between cycles). 7. Failure to give 2 breaths between each cycle of compressions. 1

a. Timing (not completing breaths and returning to compressions in less than 10 seconds (This will be measured from the end of last down stroke to the start of the first down stroke of the next cycle.) 1

b. Volume shall be at least .8 liters (through .7 liter line on new manikins). Over

inflation shall not be discounted. 1

16

8. Failure to give 5 cycles of 30 compressions and 2 breaths for each set of CPR (point of first down stroke to peak of last breath). (A cycle is 30 compressions and two (2) ventilations. A set is 5 cycles.) 1

9. Failure to assess pulse within 10 seconds after each set of CPR. 1 (one discount

per set) 10. Failure to give 30 chest compressions when airway obstruction is suspected.____1 11. Failure to perform CPR as stated in the problem. Too many or too few

compressions can be detrimental to patient. 1 12. Failure for the number of Rescuer/Rescuers to perform CPR as stated in the

problem. Team performing One-Person CPR when Two-Person CPR is required and vice versa. 3 (When problem states “Two-Rescuer CPR”, two people are required to perform CPR as listed in Two-Rescuer CPR skill sheets.)

13. Failure to begin with compressions after pulse check is completed or when

changing rescuers. 1

14. Failure to apply the AED when available______10 15. Failure of rescuers to change positions in 5 seconds or less when performing two-

person CPR. 1 16. Failure of rescuer to state that patient has a pulse when CPR is completed. 1

17. Failure of the printing device to print the results of Cardiopulmonary

Resuscitation given._____10

Artificial Ventilation 1. Failure to give artificial ventilation. _______ 20 (Maximum of 3 sets AV/CPR or combination thereof) 2. Failure to give 10-12 breaths in each 58-62-second period. 1 (1 minute of AV = 1 set) 3. Failure to provide a breath volume of at least .8 liters (through .7 liter line on new

manikins). Over inflation shall not be discounted. _______ 1

17

4. Failure of rescuer to check for return of breathing and pulse when artificial

ventilation is completed. 1 5. Failure of rescuer to state that patient is breathing and has a pulse when artificial

ventilation is completed. 1

INITIAL ASSESSMENT

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. SCENE SIZE UP □ □

*A. Observe area to ensure safety

*B. Call for help

2. MECHANISM OF INJURY

□ □ □

*A. Determine causes of injury, if possible *B. Triage: Immediate, Delayed, Minor or Deceased. *C. Ask patient (if conscious) what happened

3. INITIAL ASSESSMENT

□ □ □

*A. Verbalize general impression of the patient(s) *B. Determine responsiveness/level of consciousness

(AVPU) Alert, Verbal, Painful, Unresponsive *C. Determine chief complaint/apparent life threat

4. ASSESS AIRWAY AND BREATHING

□ □ □

A. Correctly execute head-tilt/chin-lift or jaw thrust maneuver, depending on the presence of cervical spine (neck) injuries

B. Look for absence of breathing (no chest rise and fall) or gasping, which are not considered adequate (within 10 seconds)

C. If present, treat sucking chest wound

5. ASSESS FOR CIRCULATION

□ □ □

A. Check for presence of a carotid pulse (5-10

seconds) B. If present, control life threatening bleeding C. Start treatment for all other life threatening

injuries/conditions (reference Rule 2).

IMMEDIATE: Rapid Patient Assessment treating all life threats Load and Go. If the treatment interrupts the rapid trauma assessment, the assessment will be completed at the end of the treatment. DELAYED: Detailed Patient Assessment treating all injuries and conditions and prepare for transport.

18

MINOR: (Can walk) Detailed Patient Assessment treating all injuries and conditions and prepare for transport. After all IMMEDIATE and DELAYED patient(s) have been treated and transported. DECEASED: Cover NOTE: Each critical skill identified with an asterisk (*) shall be clearly verbalized by the team as it is being conducted. After initially stating what DOTS stands for, the team may simply state “DOTS” when making their checks.

Teams may use the acronym “CSM” when checking circulation, sensation, and motor function.

19

PATIENT ASSESSMENT PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. HEAD

□

□ □ □ □

□ □

*A. Check head for DOTS: Deformities, Open wounds, Tenderness and Swelling

*B. Check and touch the scalp *C. Check the face *D. Check the ears for bleeding or clear fluids *E. Check the eyes for any discoloration, unequal pupils,

reaction to light, foreign objects and bleeding *F. Check the nose for any bleeding or drainage *G. Check the mouth for loose or broken teeth, foreign

objects, swelling or injury of tongue, unusual breath odor and discoloration

2. NECK □ □

*A. Check the neck for DOTS *B. Inspect for medical ID

3. CHEST

□ □ □

*A. Check chest area for DOTS *B. Feel chest for equal breathing movement on both sides *C. Feel chest for inward movement in the rib areas

during inhalations

4. ABDOMEN □ *A. Check abdomen (stomach) for DOTS

5. PELVIS □ □

*A. Check pelvis for DOTS *B. Inspect pelvis for injury by touch (Visually inspect and

verbally state inspection of crotch and buttocks areas)

6. LEGS

L □ □ □

□

□

R □ □ □

□

□

*A. Check each leg for DOTS B. Inspect legs for injury by touch C. Unresponsive: Check legs for paralysis (pinch inner

side of leg on calf) *D. Responsive: Check legs for motion; places hand on

bottom of each foot and states “Can you push against my hand?”

*E. Check for medical ID bracelet

20

7. ARMS

L □ □ □

□

□

R □ □ □

□

□

*A. Check each arm for DOTS B. Inspect arms for injury by touch C. Unresponsive: Check arms for paralysis (pinch inner

side of wrist) *D. Responsive: Check arms for motion (in a conscious

patient; team places fingers in each hand of patient and states “Can you squeeze my fingers?”

*E. Check for medical ID bracelet

8. BACK SURFACES

□

*A. Check back for DOTS

21

ONE-PERSON CPR (MANIKIN ONLY)

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. RESCUER 1 – ESTABLISH UNRESPONSIVENESS

□ □ □

□ □

A. Tap or gently shake shoulders *B. “Are you OK?” C. Determine unconsciousness without compromising

cervical spine (neck) injury *D. “Call for help”

*E. “Get AED” (Note: If AED is used, follow local protocol)

2. RESCUER 1 – MONITOR PATIENT FOR BREATHING

□

A. Look for absence of breathing (no chest rise and fall) or gasping breaths, which are not considered adequate (within 10 seconds)

3. RESCUER 1 – CHECK FOR CAROTID PULSE

□

□

□

A. Correctly locate the carotid pulse - on the side of the rescuer, locate the patient’s windpipe with your index and middle fingers and slide your fingers in the groove between the windpipe and the muscle in the neck

B. Check for presence of carotid pulse for 5 to 10 Seconds

*C. Absence of pulse

*D. Immediately start CPR if no pulse

4. POSITION FOR COMPRESSIONS

□

□

□ □

A. Locate the compression point on the breastbone between the nipples

B. Place the heel of one hand on the compression point and the other hand on top of the first so hands are parallel

C. Do not intentionally rest fingers on the chest D. Keep heel of your hand on chest during and between

compressions

5. DELIVER CARDIAC COMPRESSION

□ □

□

□

A. Give 30 compressions B. Compressions are at the rate of at least 100-120 per

minute (30 compressions delivered within 18 seconds)

C. Down stroke for compression must be on or through compression line

D. Return to baseline on upstroke of compression

6. ESTABLISH AIRWAY

□ □

A. Kneel at the patient’s side near the head B. Correctly execute head-tilt/ chin-lift or jaw thrust

maneuver depending on the presence of cervical spine injuries

22

7. VENTILATIONS BETWEEN COMPRESSIONS

□

□ □

□

A. Place barrier device (pocket mask / shield with one way valve) on manikin

B. Give 2 breaths 1 second each C. Each breath - minimum of .8 (through .7 liter line on

new manikins) D. Complete breaths and return to compressions in less

than 10 seconds (This will be measured from the end of last down stroke to the start of the first down stroke of the next cycle.)

8. CONTINUE CPR FOR TIME STATED IN PROBLEM

□

□

□

□ □

□

A. Provide 5 cycles of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths

B. To check for pulse, stop chest compressions for no more than 10 seconds after the first set of CPR

C. Rescuer opens airway and checks for adequate breathing or coughing

D. Rescuer checks for a carotid pulse E. If no signs of circulation are detected, continue chest

compressions and breaths and check for signs of circulation after each set

F. A maximum of 10 seconds will be allowed to complete ventilations and required pulse checks between sets (this will be measured from the end of the last down stroke to the start of the first down stroke of the next cycle)

9. CHECK FOR RETURN OF PULSE

□

□

A. After providing required CPR (outlined in problem), check for return of pulse (within 10 seconds)

*B. “Patient has a pulse.”

23

TW0-RESCUER CPR WITH AED (NO SPINAL INJURY - MANIKIN ONLY)

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. RESCUER 1 – ESTABLISH UNRESPONSIVENESS

□ □ □

□ □

A. Tap or gently shake shoulders *B. “Are you OK?” C. Determine unconsciousness without compromising

cervical spine (neck) injury *D. “Call for help”

*E. “Get AED” (Note: If AED is used, follow local protocol)

2. RESCUER 1 – MONITOR PATIENT FOR BREATHING

□

A. Look for absence of breathing (no chest rise and fall) or gasping breaths, which are not considered adequate (within 10 seconds)

3. RESCUER 1 – CHECK FOR CAROTID PULSE

□

□

□

A. Correctly locate the carotid pulse - on the side of the rescuer, locate the patient’s windpipe with your index and middle fingers and slide your fingers in the groove between the windpipe and the muscle in the neck

B. Check for presence of carotid pulse for 5 to 10 Seconds

*C. Absence of pulse

*D. Immediately starts CPR if no pulse

4. RESCUER 2 - POSITION FOR COMPRESSIONS

□

□

□

A. Locate the compression point on the breastbone between the nipples

B. Place the heel of one hand on the compression point and the other hand on top of the first so hands are parallel.

C. Do not intentionally rest fingers on the chest. Keep heel of your hand on chest during and between compressions.

5. RESCUER 2 - DELIVER CARDIAC COMPRESSION

□ □

□

□

A. Give 30 compressions B. Compressions are at the rate of 100 to 120 per minute

(30 compressions delivered within 18 seconds) C. Down stroke for compression must be on or through

compression line D. Return to baseline on upstroke of compression

6. RESCUER 1 -ESTABLISH AIRWAY

□ □

A. Kneel at the patient’s side near the head B. Correctly execute head-tilt/ chin-lift maneuver

24

7. RESCUER 1 - VENTILATIONS BETWEEN COMPRESSIONS

□

□ □

□

A. Place barrier device (pocket mask / shield with one way valve) on manikin

B. Give 2 breaths 1 second each C. Each breath - minimum of .8 (through .7 liter line on

new manikins) D. Complete breaths and return to compressions in less

than 10 seconds (This will be measured from the end of last down stroke to the start of the first down stroke of the next cycle.)

8. CONTINUE CPR FOR TIME STATED IN PROBLEM

□

□

□

□

□

□

A. Provide 5 cycles of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths

B. To check for pulse, stop chest compressions for no more than 10 seconds after the first set of CPR

C. Rescuer at patient’s head maintains airway and checks for adequate breathing or coughing

D. The rescuer at the patient’s head shall feel for a carotid pulse

E. If no signs of circulation are detected, continue chest compressions and breaths and check for signs of circulation after each set

F. A maximum of 10 seconds will be allowed to complete ventilations and required pulse checks between sets (this will be measured from the end of the last down stroke to the start of the first down stroke of the next cycle

9. FIRST RESCUER APPLIES THE AED (DURING THE FIFTH CYCLE OF COMPRESSIONS)

□

□

□

A. Second rescuer continues compressions while First rescuer turns (simulated) on AED and applies pads.

B. RESCUERS SWITCH-First rescuer clears victim, allowing AED to analyze. (Judges shall provide an envelope indicating a shockable or non-shockable rhythm)

C. If AED indicates a shockable rhythm, first rescuer

clears victim again and delivers shock. *verbalize shock given

10. RESUME HIGH-QUALITY CPR

□

□

A. First rescuer gives 30 compressions immediately after shock delivery (2 cycles).

B. First rescuer successfully delivers 2 breaths.

11. CHANGING RESCUERS

□

A. Change of rescuers shall be made in 5 seconds or less and will be completed as outlined in the problem. Team must switch every 5 cycles in less than 5

25

seconds.

12. CHECK FOR RETURN OF PULSE

□ □

A. After providing required CPR (outlined in problem), check for return of pulse (within 10 seconds)

*B. “Patient has a pulse.”

26

TWO-RESCUER CPR WITH AED (WITH SPINAL INJURY - MANIKIN ONLY)

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. RESCUER 1 - ESTABLISH UNRESPONSIVENESS

□ □ □

□ □

A. Tap or gently shake shoulders *B. “Are you OK?” C. Determine unconsciousness without compromising

cervical spine (neck) injury *D. “Call for help”

*E. “Get AED” (Note: If AED is used, follow local protocol)

2. RESCUER 1 - MONITOR PATIENT FOR BREATHING

□ A. Look for absence of breathing (no chest rise and fall) or gasping, which are not considered adequate (within 10 seconds)

3. RESCUER 1 – CHECK FOR CAROTID PULSE

□

□ □ □

A. Correctly locate the carotid pulse - on the side of the rescuer, locate the patient’s windpipe with your index and middle fingers and slide your fingers in the groove between the windpipe and the muscle in the neck

B. Check for presence of carotid pulse for 5 to 10 second *C. Absence of pulse

*D. Immediately start CPR if no pulse

4. RESCUER 1 - POSITION FOR COMPRESSIONS

□

□

□

A. Locate the compression point on the breastbone between the nipples

B. Place the heel of one hand on sternum the compression point and the other hand on top of the first so hands are parallel

C. Do not rest fingers on the chest Keep heel of your hand on chest during and between

compressions

5. RESCUER 1 - DELIVER CARDIAC COMPRESSION

□ □

□

□

A. Give 30 compressions B. Compressions are at the rate of 100 to 120 per minute

(30 compressions delivered within 18 seconds) C. Down stroke for compression must be on or through

compression line D. Return to baseline on upstroke of compression

6. RESCUER 2 - ESTABLISH AIRWAY

□ □

A. Kneel at the patient’s head B. Correctly execute jaw thrust maneuver

27

7. RESCUER 2 - VENTILATIONS BETWEEN COMPRESSIONS

□

□ □

□

A. Rescuer 1 should place the barrier device (pocket mask/Shield with one way valve) on manikin (OPTION 1: When spinal injury is present, Rescuer No. 2 can hold barrier device on manikin after Rescuer No. 1 correctly places device over the mouth and nose (OPTION 2: Rescuer 1 can place the device on the manikin each time patient is ventilated

B. Rescuer 2 Gives 2 breaths 1 second each C. Each breath - minimum of .8 (through .7 liter line on

new manikins) D. Complete breaths and return to compressions in less

than 10 seconds (This will be measured from the end of last down stroke to the start of the first down stroke of the next cycle.)

8. CONTINUE CPR FOR TIME STATED IN PROBLEM

□

□

□

□

□

□

A. Provide 5 cycles of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths

B. To check pulse, stop chest compressions for no more than 10 seconds after the first set of CPR

C. Rescuer at patient’s head maintains airway and checks for adequate breathing or coughing

D. The rescuer giving compressions shall feel for a carotid pulse

E. If no signs of circulation are detected, continue chest compressions and breaths and check for signs of circulation after each set

F. A maximum of 10 seconds will be allowed to complete ventilations and required pulse checks between sets (this will be measured from the end of the last down stroke to the start of the first down stroke of the next cycle

9. FIRST RESCUER APPLIES THE AED (DURING THE FIFTH CYCLE OF COMPRESSIONS)

□

□

□

A. First rescuer continues compressions while second rescuer turns on AED and applies pads.

B. RESCUERS SWITCH-First rescuer clears victim, allowing AED to analyze. (Judges shall provide an envelope indicating a shockable or non-shockable rhythm)

C. If AED indicates a shockable rhythm, first rescuer

clears victim again and delivers shock. *verbalize shock given

28

10. RESUME HIGH-QUALITY CPR

□

□

A. First rescuer gives 30 compressions immediately after shock delivery (2 cycles).

B. Second rescuer successfully delivers 2 breaths.

11. CHANGING RESCUERS □ A. Change of rescuers shall be made in 5 seconds or less

and will be completed as outlined in problem. Team must switch every 5 cycles in less than 5 seconds.

12. CHECK FOR RETURN OF PULSE

□

□

A. A final pulse check will be required at the end of the last set of CPR (within 10 seconds)

*B. “Patient has a pulse.”

29

MOUTH-TO-MASK RESUSCITATION

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. ESTABLISH UNRESPONSIVENESS

□ □ □

□ □

A. Tap or gently shake shoulders *B. “Are you OK?” C. Determine unconsciousness without

compromising C-spine injury *D. “Call for help”

*E. “Get AED” (Note: If AED is used, follow local protocol)

2. MONITOR PATIENT FOR BREATHING

□

A. Look for absence of breathing (no chest rise and fall) or gasping, which are not considered adequate (within 10 seconds)

3. CHECK FOR CAROTID PULSE

□

□

□

A. Correctly locate the carotid pulse (on the side of the rescuer)

B. Check for presence of carotid pulse within 10 seconds

*C. Presence of pulse

4. ESTABLISH AIRWAY □

A. Correctly execute head tilt / chin lift or jaw thrust maneuver depending on the presence of cervical spine (neck) injuries

5. VENTILATE PATIENT

□

□

A. Place barrier device (pocket mask/shield with one-

way valve on manikin B. Ventilate patient 10 to 12 times per minute. Each

ventilation will be provided at a minimum of .8 (through .7 liter line on new manikins)

6. CHECK FOR RETURN OF BREATHING AND PULSE

□

□

A. After providing the required number of breaths (outlined in problem), check for return of breathing and carotid pulse within 10 seconds

*B. “Patient is breathing and has a pulse”

30

AIRWAY OBSTRUCTION (UNCONSCIOUS VICTIM – WITNESSED)

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. INTIALLY ASSESS LEVEL OF CONSCIOUSNESS

□ □ □

□ □

A. Tap or gently shake shoulders *B. “Are you OK?” C. Determine unconsciousness without compromising

C-spine injury *D. “Call for help” *E. “Get AED” (Note: If AED is used, follow local

protocol)

2. MONITOR PATIENT FOR BREATHING

□

A. Look for absence of breathing (no chest rise and fall) or gasping, which are not considered adequate (within 10 seconds)

3. PULSE CHECK

□

□

□

A. Correctly locate the carotid pulse - on the side of the rescuer, locate the patient’s windpipe with your index and middle fingers and slide your fingers in the groove between the windpipe and muscle in the neck

B. Check for presence of carotid pulse for 5 to 10 seconds

*C. Patient has pulse

4. OPEN AIRWAY

□

□

A. Correctly execute head-tilt/chin-lift or jaw thrust maneuver depending on the presence of cervical spine (neck) injuries

*B. “Look for foreign object”

5. ATTEMPT VENTILATION

□ □ □ □

A. Place barrier device on manikin B. Seal mouth and nose C. Attempt to give slow breath (1 second duration)

*D. Identify if there is an obstruction

6. CHECK POSITIONING

□

□

A. Re-establish airway using correct method and procedure

*B. Identify continued presence of the obstruction

7. POSITION FOR COMPRESSIONS

□

□

□

A. Locate the compression point on the breastbone between the nipples

B. Place the heel of one hand on sternum the compression point and the other hand on top of the first so hands are parallel

C. Do not rest fingers on the chest keep heel of your hand on chest during and between compressions.

31

8. COMPRESSIONS

□ □

□

□

A. Give 30 compressions B. Compressions are at the rate of at least 100-120 per

minute (30 compressions delivered within 18 seconds)

C. Down stroke for compression must be on or through compression line

D. Return to baseline on upstroke of compression

9. OPEN AIRWAY

□

□

A. Correctly execute head-tilt / chin-lift or jaw-thrust maneuver depending on the presence of cervical spine (neck) injuries

*B “Look for foreign object”

10. PERFORM FINGER SWEEP (IF OBJECT IS SEEN)

□

□

A. Follow with finger sweep, only if the object is seen. (open mouth, grasping tongue and lower jaw with thumb and fingers, insert index finger of other hand down along inside cheek and deeply into throat in a hooking action)

B. Grasp and remove foreign object

11. ATTEMPT VENTILATION

□ □

□

A. Correctly make effort to administer breath B. Administer second breath, if first successful and

check pulse C. If unsuccessful repeat sequence of compressions,

mouth check, finger sweep (if object is visible) and attempt to ventilate

32

SUCKING CHEST WOUND

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. EXPOSE WOUND □ *A. Expose entire wound

2. SEAL WOUND AND CONTROL BLEEDING

□

□

*A. Place occlusive dressing over wound (If occlusive dressing is not available use gloved hand)

B. Apply direct pressure as needed to stop the bleeding

3. APPLY AN OCCLUSIVE DRESSING

□ □ □

□ □ □

□ □

□ □

A. Keep patient calm and quiet *B. Explain to the patient what you are doing *C. Ensure dressing is large enough not to be sucked

into the wound (two inches beyond edges of wound)

D. Affix dressing with tape *E. Seal on three sides

*F. Monitor patient closely for increasing difficulty breathing

*G. Transport as soon as possible

H. Keep patient positioned on the injured side unless other injuries prohibit

*I. Reassess wound to ensure bleeding control

*J. Assess level of consciousness(AVPU), respiratory status and patient response

33

LIFE-THREATENING BLEEDING

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. DIRECT PRESSURE AND ELEVATION

□ □

□

□ □

*A. Apply direct pressure with a gloved hand

*B. Apply a dressing to wound (cover entire wound) and continue to apply direct pressure

*C. Elevate the extremity except when spinal injury exists

*D. Bleeding has been controlled

*E. If controlled, bandage dressing in place

2. IF NOTIFIED THAT BLEEDING IS NOT CONTROLLED, PRESSURE POINTS SHALL BE UTILIZED

□

□

*A. Apply pressure to appropriate pressure point and notify judge verbally that bleeding is controlled (Apply pressure to blood vessels leading to area – in arm, press just below armpit; in leg, press against groin where thigh and trunk join.)

B. If controlled, bandage dressing in place

2. IF NOTIFIED THAT BLEEDING IS NOT CONTROLLED, APPLY TOURIQUET

□ A. Apply as per tourniquet skill sheet

External Bleeding To Control: 1st: direct pressure 2nd: elevation & direct pressure 3rd: pressure point Last Resort: Tourniquet Internal Bleeding *1. Monitor breathing and pulse *2. Keep patient still *3. Loosen restrictive clothing *4. Be alert if patient vomits *5. Nothing by mouth *6. Report possibility of internal bleeding as soon as EMS personnel arrive on scene

34

TOURNIQUET

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. DETERMINE NEED OR USING TOURNIQUET

□

□

□

If these conditions are met, a tourniquet may be the only alternative:

A. Direct pressure has not been successful in stopping bleeding

B. Elevation of wound above heart has not been successful in stopping of bleeding

C. Compression of pressure point has not been successful in stopping of bleeding.

2. SELECT APPROPRIATE MATERIALS

□

A. Select a band that will be between 31-4 inches in

width and can be wrapped six or eight layers deep for improvised tourniquet or select factory tourniquet.

3. APPLY TOURNIQUET

□

□

□

□

Factory Tourniquet A. Wrap band around the extremity proximal to the

wound (one inch above but not on a joint) Improvised Tourniquet B. Apply a bandage around the extremity proximal to

the wound (one inch above but not on a joint) and tie a half knot in the bandage

C. Place a stick or pencil on top of the knot and tie the ends of the bandage over the stick in a square knot

D. Twist the stick until the bleeding is controlled, secure the stick in position

4. APPLY PRESSURE WITH TOURNIQUET

□

□

A. Do not cover the tourniquet with bandaging material

*B. Notify other medical personnel caring for the patient

5. MARK PATIENT APPROPRIATELY

□

A. Mark a piece of tape on the patient’s forehead “TQ” and time applied

6. REASSESS □

*A. Assess level of consciousness (AVPU), respiratory status, and patient response

35

DRESSINGS AND BANDAGING – OPEN WOUNDS

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. EMERGENCY CARE FOR AN OPEN WOUND

□ □ □

□

*A. Control bleeding *B. Prevent further contamination *C. Bandage dressing in place after bleeding has been

controlled *D. Keep patient lying still

2. APPLY DRESSING

□ □ □ □

A. Use sterile dressing B. Cover entire wound C. Control bleeding D. Do not remove dressing

3. APPLY BANDAGE

□ □ □ □ □

□

A. Do not bandage too tightly. B. Do not bandage too loosely. C. Do not leave loose ends. D. Cover all edges of dressing. E. Do not cover tips of fingers and toes, unless they

are injured. F. Bandage from the bottom of the limb to the top

(distal to proximal) if applicable.

Multiple wounds will be treated as per procedures listed in patient assessment. Impaled Objects *1. Do not remove 2. Expose wound 3. Control bleeding 4. Stabilize with a bulky dressing; criss-cross the layers 5. Tie 4in. wide cravats around to hold in place, or tape in place *6. Check for exit wound (treat when found) 7. Immobilize affected area Impaled Objects in the Cheek *1. Examine; inside & outside 2. If end not impaled in mouth – pull it out 3. Position head for drainage: if spinal injury, immobilize 1st and tilt board 4. Dress outside of wound *5. Gauze on inside only if patient alert, (Simulate only in contest and state, “I would leave 3-4

inches of gauze outside of mouth.”)

36

Impaled Objects in the Eye

1. Stabilize with 3 inch gauze or folded 4x4 2. Put cup (no Styrofoam) over object and allow cup to rest on roller gauze or 4x4 3. Secure cup with roller gauze (not over top of cup) *4. Cover uninjured eye too

Open Neck Wound (Serious or Life Threatening)

*1. Gloved hand over wound *2. Occlusive dressing over wound- 2 inches larger than wound site 3. Gauze dressing over occlusive 4. Place roller gauze beside site and wrap around figure 8 under opposite arm

Abdominal Injury

*1. Place on back with legs flexed at the knees (for closed or open wounds)

Additional Steps for Open Abdominal Wounds (Serious or Life Threatening)

*1. Apply moist dressing, then an occlusive dressing *2. Cover the occlusive with pads or a towel for warmth *3. If an object is impaled in abs, stabilize it and do not flex legs- leave them in the position you

found them.

Skull Fractures and Brain Injuries

*1. Open airway with jaw thrust 2. Apply collar *3. Use loose gauze dressing- no direct pressure *4. Keep at rest, ask them questions 5. Don’t elevate legs (on or off a backboard) 6. After entire body is immobilized- tilt back board, injured side down

Amputations

*1. Wrap in slightly moistened sterile dressing 2. Place in plastic bag or wrap in plastic *3. Keep part cool avoid freezing *4. Do not place in water or direct contact with ice *5. Transport with patient 6. Label with patients name

NOTE: Slings are required for all wounds of upper extremities, including shoulder and armpit wounds. Slings will not be required for upper extremity burns. However, if a burn and wound and/or fracture/dislocation are present on the same upper extremity, a sling shall be applied.

37

TWO-PERSON LOG ROLL

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. STABILIZE HEAD □ *A. Stabilize the head and neck

2. PREPARING THE PATIENT

□

□

A. When placing patient on board place board parallel to the patient

B. Kneel at the patient’s shoulders opposite the board (if used) leaving room to roll the patient toward knees

Raise the patient’s arm, if not injured (the one closer to the rescuer) above the patient’s head

3. PREPARING THE RESCUER

□ □

A. Grasp the patient at the shoulder and pelvis area B. Give instructions to bystander, if used to support

4. ROLLING THE PATIENT

□

□

□

□

□

A. While stabilizing the head, roll the patient toward the rescuer by pulling steadily and evenly at the shoulder and pelvis areas

B. The head and neck should remain on the same plane as the torso

C. Maintain stability by holding patient with one hand and placing board (if used) with other

D. Roll the body as a unit onto the board (if used) (board may be slanted or flat)

E. Place the arm alongside the body

38

THREE-PERSON LOG ROLL

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. STABILIZE HEAD

□ □

*A. Stabilize the head and neck

B. One rescuer should kneel at the top of the patient’s head and hold or stabilize the head and neck in position found.

2. PREPARING THE PATIENT

□

□

□

□

□

A. A second rescuer should kneel at the patient’s side opposite the direction the face is facing.

B. When placing patient on board place board parallel to the patient.

C. Quickly assess the patient’s arms to ensure no obvious injuries.

D. Kneel at the patient’s shoulders opposite the board (if used) leaving room to roll the patient toward knees

Raise the patient’s arm, if not injured (the one closer to the rescuer) above the patient’s head.

E. The third rescuer should kneel at the patient’s hips.

3. PREPARING THE RESCUER

□ □

A. Rescuers should grasp the patient at the shoulders, hips, knees, and ankles.

*B. Give instructions to bystander, if used to support

4. ROLLING THE PATIENT

□

□

□

□

□

□

□

□

*A. While stabilizing the head, the rescuer at the patient’s head should signal and give directions, * on three, slowly roll. One, two, three roll together. All rescuers should slowly roll the patient toward the rescuers in a coordinated move, keeping the spine in a neutral, in-line position.

B. The head and neck should remain on the same plane as the torso, the rescuer holding the head should not initially try to turn the head with the body. (if the head is already facing sideways, allow the body to come into alignment with the head)

C. Maintain stability by holding patient with one hand and placing board (if used) with other

D. Roll the body as a unit onto the board (if used) (board may be slanted or flat) Center the patient on the board.

E. Place the arm alongside the body

39

SPLINTING (RIGID) UPPER EXTREMITY FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. CARE FOR FRACTURE

□

*A. Check for distal circulation, sensation, and motor function Do not attempt to reduce dislocations (if

applies)

2. IMMOBILIZING FRACTURE

□

□ □

□

□

□ □

A. Selection of appropriate rigid splint of proper length

B. Support affected limb and limit movement C. Apply appropriate padded rigid splint against

injured extremity D. Place appropriate roller bandage in hand to

ensure the position of function E. Secure splint to patient with roller bandage,

handkerchiefs, cravats, or cloth strips F. Apply wrap distal to proximal

*G. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor function

3. SECURING WITH SLING

□ □ □

□ □

□ □ □

A. Place sling over chest and under arm B. Hold or stabilize arm C. Triangle should extend behind elbow on injured

side D. Pull sling around neck and tie on uninjured side E. Pad at the neck (except when C-Collar is

present) F. Secure excess material at elbow G. Fingertips should be exposed

*H. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor function

4. SECURING SLING WITH SWATHE

□ □ □

A. Use triangle cravat or factory swathe B. Swathe is tied around chest and injured arm

*C. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor function

ELBOW (STRAIGHT POSITION) Follow Procedures No. 1 and No. 2 above FINGER/FINGERS Immobilize Fracture 1. Tape injured finger to an adjacent uninjured finger; or 2. Tape injured finger to a tongue depressor, aluminum splint, or pen and pencil 3. Secure with sling and swathe

40

COLLAR BONE Support and limit movement of affected area Follow Procedures No. 1, No. 3 and No. 4 above SHOULDER BLADE Support and limit movement of affected area Follow Procedures No. 1, No. 3 and No. 4 above NOTE: Do not reposition dislocations

SPLINTING (SOFT) UPPER EXTREMITY FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS (WRIST AND HAND)

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. CARE FOR FRACTURE

□

□

*A. Check for distal circulation, sensation, and motor function

B. Do not attempt to reduce dislocations (if applies)

2. IMMOBILIZING FRACTURE

□ □

□

□ □

A. Support affected limb and limit movement B. Place two cravats (triangular bandage) under

wrist/hand C. Place pillow length wise under wrist/hand, on

top of cravats (pillow should extend past fingertips)

D. Lower limb, adjust cravats to tie E. Tie cravats distal to proximal

3. SECURING WITH SLING

□ □ □

□ □ □

A. Place sling over chest and under arm B. Hold or stabilize arm C. Triangle should extend behind elbow or injured

side D. Secure excess material at elbow E. Fingertips should be exposed

*F. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor function

4. SECURING SLING WITH SWATHE

□ □ □

A. Use triangle cravat or factory swathe B. Swathe is tied around chest and injured arm

*C. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor function

41

SPLINTING (RIGID OR SOFT) PELVIC GIRDLE, THIGH, KNEE, AND LOWER LEG

PROCEDURE CRITICAL SKILL

1. DETERMINE NEED FOR SPLINTING

□

□

*A. Assess for: Pain Swelling Deformity

B. Determine if splinting is warranted

2. APPLY MANUAL STABILIZATION

□

A. Support affected limb and limit movement Do not attempt to reduce dislocations

3. SELECT APPROPRIATE SPLINT

□

□

A. Select appropriate splinting method depending on position of extremity and materials available

B. Select appropriate padding material

4. PREPARE FOR SPLINTING

□ □

□

□ □

A. Remove or cut away clothing as needed *B. Assess distal circulation, sensation, and motor

function C. Cover any open wounds with sterile dressing

and bandage D. Measure splint E. Pad around splint for patient comfort

42

5. SPLINT

□

□ □

□

□ □

□

□

□

□

□ □

□

□ □ □ □ □

□

A. Maintain support while splinting

Living Splint: A. Immobilize the site of the injury B. Carefully place a pillow or folded blanket

between the patients knees/legs C. Bind the legs together with wide straps or

cravats D. Carefully place patient on long spine board E. Secure the patient to the long spine board (if

primary splint) *F. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor

function Padded Board Splint: A. Splint with two long padded splinting boards

(one should be long enough to extend from the patient’s armpit to beyond the foot. The other should extend from the groin to beyond the foot.) (Lower leg requires boards to extend from knee to below the foot.)

B. Cushion with padding in the armpit and groin and all voids created at the ankle and knee

C. Secure the splinting boards with straps and cravats

D. Carefully place the patient on long spine board E. Secure the patient to the long spine board (if

primary splint) *F. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor

function Other Splints: A. Immobilize the site of the injury B. Pad as needed C. Secure to splint distal to proximal D. Carefully place patient on long spine board E. Secure the patient to the long spine board (if

primary splint) *F. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor

function

6. REASSESS □ *A. Assess patient response and level of comfort

43

SPLINTING (SOFT) LOWER EXTREMITY FRACTURES AND DISLOCATIONS (ANKLE AND FOOT)

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. CARE FOR FRACTURE

□

□

*A. Assess for distal circulation, sensation, and motor function

B. Do not attempt to reduce dislocations (if applies)

2. IMMOBILIZING FRACTURE

□ □

□

□ □ □ □

A. Support affected limb and limit movement B. Place three cravats (triangular bandage) under

ankle/foot C. Place pillow length wise under ankle/foot, on

top of cravats (pillow should extend 6 inches beyond foot)

D. Lower limb, adjust cravats to tie E. Tie cravats distal to proximal F. Elevate with blanket or pillow

*G. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor function

44

SPLINTING UPPER EXTREMITY/LOWER EXTREMITY FRACTURES (AIR SPLINT)

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. CARE FOR FRACTURE □

*A. Assess distal circulation, sensation, and motor

function(fingers/toes)

2. IMMOBILIZE FRACTURE

□ □ □ □ □

□

A. Grasp above and below the injury site

B. Maintain support

C. Properly apply air splint

D. Splint should be relatively free of wrinkles

E. Inflate splint to point that slight dent can be

made

*F. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor

function (fingers/toes)

3. MONITOR AIR-INFLATED SPLINT

□

□ □ □

*A. Periodically check for increase or decrease in

pressure

*B. Monitor pressure in splint with finger tip

C. Make sure desired pressure is maintained

*D. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor

function (fingers/toes)

NOTE: Air splints may not be used with open (protruding bones) fractures.

Air splints may only be used on the lower part of the extremities (from below the elbow on the arm and below the knee to the leg).

45

SPLINTING – FLAIL CHEST

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. DETERMINE NEED FOR SPLINTING

□

□

*A. Assess for:

Pain

Swelling

Deformity

*B. Determine if splinting is warranted

2. SELECT APPROPRIATE SPLINTING MATERIAL

□ A. Choose a pillow, blanket, trauma dressing, or other

appropriate splinting material

3. PREPARE FOR SPLINTING

□ □

*A. Remove or cut away clothing as needed.

B. Cover any open wounds with sterile dressing and

bandage

4. APPLY SPLINT

□

□ □

□

A. Affix splint to chest with adhesive tape or roller

bandage

B. Immobilize the site of injury

C. Use caution when taping splint to chest

circumferentially

*D. Ensure sufficient chest expansion

5. REASSESS □ *A. Assess patient response and level of comfort

6. ASSIST VENTILATIONS □ *A. Assist with ventilation as needed

46

ONE RESCUER BLANKET DRAG

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. VICTIM SUPINE ON GROUND

□

□

A. Properly prepare blanket for use in blanket

drag

B. Spread blanket alongside patient with

approximately one half the width gathered

lengthwise into pleats

2. POSITION PATIENT

□ □

□

A. Properly roll victim on one side

B. Take patients arm on side of body opposite to

blanket and extend arm over head

C. Support head and neck roll patient on side

away from Blanket

3. PLACE PATIENT ON BLANKET

□ □

□

□ □

A. Properly position on blanket

B. Hold patient on side while pleated portion of

blanket is pulled in close to victim’s back

C. Roll patient onto blanket, extend opposite arm

and roll onto opposite side

D. Smooth out pleats and roll patient onto back

E. Snugly wrap patient in blanket with arms at

sides

4. PREPARE TO DRAG PATIENT

□ □

A. Proper blanket drag of patient

B. Grasp portion of blanket beneath victim’s head

and drag victim to safety

47

TWO RESCUER EXTREMITY GROUND LIFT

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. POSITIONING

□

□

A. Rescuer 1 – Kneel at the head of the patient

and place one hand under each of the

shoulders

B. Rescuer 2 – Kneel by the patients knees feet

and grasp the patient’s wrist

2. RAISING PATIENT TO A SITTING POSITION

□

□

A. Direct rescuer 2-to pull patient into a sitting

position.

B. Rescuer 1 – push patient’s shoulders up, slip

your arms under the patient’s armpits and

grasp wrist. and support patient’s back and

head with body

C. Rescuer 2 – Gently pull on patient’s arms

3. POSITIONING AND LIFTING

□

□

□

A. Rescuer 1 – Support patient in sitting position

Once the patient is in a semi sitting position

have rescuer 2 crouch down and grasp the

patient’s legs behind the knees.

B. Rescuer 1-Directs rescuer 2 so you both stand

at the same time. Then move as a unit when

carrying the patient.

C. The rescuer at the head to direct the rescuer at

the feet when to stop the carry and when to

place the patient down in a supine or seated

position.

D. Rescuer 2 – Slip hands under the patient’s

knees

E. On command, rescuers stand simultaneously,

lifting patient with proper body mechanics

48

SHIRT DRAG

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. POSITIONING □

A. Rescuer - Kneel at the head of the patient and place one hand under each of the shoulders

2. MOVING PATIENT

□ □

A. Rescuer – Grasp shirt at the shoulder area B. Drag patient in a straight (keep spine as

straight as possible avoid dragging a patient sideways, by one arm, or one leg. A sideways drag can cause twisting motions of the spine that could aggravate existing injuries.)

3. MOVING PATIENT DOWN STAIRS OR INCLINE

□ A. When using a drag to move a patient down stairs or down an incline, grab the patient under the shoulders and pull the patient head first as you walk backward. If possible try to cradle the patient’s head in your forearms as you drag.

49

ESTABLISHING AIRWAY–SUSPECTED CERVICAL SPINE (NECK) INJURY

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. STABILIZE HEAD

□ □

A. Rescuer – Position at top of the victim’s head B. Restrain victim’s head and neck to avoid

voluntary or involuntary movement/rotation of the neck

2. ESTABLISH AIRWAY

□

A. Use modified jaw thrust maneuver without causing over-extension of victim’s neck

3. CHECK FOR BREATHING

□

□

A. Look for absence of breathing (no chest rise and fall) or gasping, which are not considered adequate (within 10 seconds)

*B. State that the victim is/is not breathing

4. MAINTAIN OPEN AIRWAY

□ A. Do not compromise suspected neck injury

50

SHOCK

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. CHECK FOR SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS OF SHOCK

□

□ □

*A. Check for pale (or bluish) skin (in victim with dark skin examine inside of mouth and nailbeds for bluish coloration. restlessness; anxiety; altered mental status; increased heart rate; normal to slightly low blood pressure; mildly increased breathing rate; pale (or bluish) skin (in victim with dark skin examine inside of mouth and nailbeds for bluish coloration.

*B. Check for cool, clammy moist skin; sluggish pupils; and nausea and vomiting.

*C. Check for weakness

2. TREATMENT

□ □

□ □

A. Keep victim lying down Ensure the ABCs are properly supported.

B. Control external bleeding. C. Keep the patient in a supine position. *D. Calm and reassure the patient, and maintain a

normal body temperature. E. Cover with blanket to prevent loss of body heat

and place a blanket under the patient. (Do not try to place blanket under patient with possible spinal injuries)

F. Continue to monitor and support ABCs G. Do not give the patient anything by mouth. Do

not give any fluids or food, and be alert for vomiting.

H. Monitor the patient’s vital signs. This must be done at least every five minutes.

I. Elevate according to injury

*I. Reassure and calm the patient

Option 1: Elevate the lower extremities or foot end of the back board. This procedure is performed in most cases. Place the patient flat, face up and elevate the legs or foot end of the back board 8 to 12 inches. Do not elevate any limbs with possible fractures or pelvic injuries until they have been properly splinted. Remember to consider the mechanism of injury for every patient.

Option 2: Lay the patient flat, face up. This is the supine position, used for patients with a spinal injury and patients who have serious injuries to the extremities that have not been supported. If the patient is placed in this position, you must constantly be prepared for vomiting.

51

Option 3: Slightly raise the head and shoulders. This position should be used only for responsive patients with no spinal injuries, life threatening chest or abdominal injuries and only for patients having difficulty breathing, but who have an open airway. A semi-seated position can also be used for patients with a history of heart problems. It is not recommended for moderate to severe cases of shock. Be certain to keep the patient’s head from tilting forward.

Note: Injuries requiring the injured side to be tilted or placed down may be done after patient has been properly secured to a back board if a back board is required.

52

IMMOBILIZATION – LONG SPINE BOARD (Backboard) PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. MOVE THE PATIENT ONTO THE LONG SPINE BOARD

□

□

□

□

□

□

□

□

□

A. One First Aid Provider Rescuer One at the head must maintain in-line immobilization of the head and spine

B. First Aid Provider Rescuer One at the head directs the movement of the patient

C. Other First Aid Provider Rescuers control movement of the rest of body

D. Other First Aid Provider Rescuer Two position themselves on same side

E. Upon command of First Aid Provider Rescuer One at the head, roll patient onto side toward Rescuer Two.

F. Quickly assess posterior body, if not already done

G. Place long spine board next to the patient with top of board beyond top of head

H. Place patient onto the board at command of the First Aid Provider Rescuer at head while holding in-line immobilization using methods to limit spinal movement

I. Slide patient into proper position using smooth coordinated moves keeping spine in alignment

2. PAD VOIDS BETWEEN PATIENT AND LONG SPINE BOARD

□ □ □

A. Select and use appropriate padding B. Place padding as needed under the head C. Place padding as needed under torso

3. IMMOBILIZE BODY TO THE LONG SPINE BOARD

□ A. Strap and secure body to board ensuring spinal immobilization, beginning at shoulder and working toward feet

4. IMMOBILIZE HEAD TO THE LONG SPINE BOARD

□

□

A. Using head set or place rolled towels on each side of head

B. Tape and/or strap head securely to board, ensuring cervical spine immobilization

5. REASSESS □

□

*A. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor function

*B. Assess patient response and level of comfort

53

IMMOBILIZATION OF CERVICAL SPINE

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. ESTABLISH AND MAINTAIN IN-LINE IMMOBILIZATION

□

□ □

A. Place head in a neutral, in-line position unless patient complains of pain or the head is not easily moved into position

B. Place head in alignment with spine C. Maintain constant manual in-line immobilization

until the patient is properly secured to a backboard with head immobilized

2. ASSESS CSM □ *A. Assess distal circulation, sensation, and motor

function (on all extremities)

3. ASSESS CERVICAL REGION AND NECK

□

□

*A. Inspect and palpate for injuries or signs of injuries using: DOTS acronym

B. Remove clothing or jewelry as necessary

4. BANDAGE ANY WOUND

□ A. Any neck wounds

5. APPLY CERVICAL SPINE IMMOBILIZATION

□

□ □ □

□

□ □ □ □ □ □ □

A. Apply properly sized collar or manual immobilization

One piece C-collar A. Select proper sized collar B. Apply collar C. Ensure that patient’s head is not twisted during

application D. Ensure airway is open after placement

Two piece C-collar C. Select proper sized collar D. Apply rear section to back of neck E. Center rigid support on spine F. Apply front section ( overlaps rear section) G. Ensure chin rests in chin cavity H. Secure collar with Velcro straps I. Ensure airway is open after placement

6. SECURE HEAD TO APPROPRIATE IMMOBILIZATION DEVICE

□

□

□

A. Immobilize patient to appropriate immobilization device

B. Use head set or place rolled blankets or towels on each side of head

C. Tape and or strap head securely to appropriate immobilization device

7. REASSESS □

□

*A. Reassess distal circulation, sensation, and motor function

*B. Assess patient response and level of comfort

54

BURNS PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILLS

1. DETERMINE BURN TYPE

□ *A. Determine type Thermal Chemical Electrical

2. DETERMINE BODY SURFACE AREA

□ *A. Determine Body Surface Area (BSA) using rule of

nines

3. BURN CARE (All Types)

□

□

□ □

□ □ □ □

*A. Remove patient from source of burn and prevent further contamination

*B. Consider the type of burn and stopping the burning process initially with water or saline (do not flush with water unless they involve an area less than 9% of the total body surface area) if appropriate

*C. Remove smoldering clothing (do not remove any clothing that is melted onto the skin) jewelry

*D. Continually monitor the airway for evidence of closure

E. Cover the burned area with a dry sterile dressing Prevent further contamination. Keep the burned area clean by covering it with a dressing. Cover partial- and full-thickness burns with dry clean dressings. In most cases place dry, sterile dressings onto the burned area.

F. Do not use any type of ointment, lotion or antiseptic G. Do not break blisters H. Ensure patient does not get hypothermic I. If eyes or eyelids have been burned, place dressings

or pads over them. Moisten these pads with sterile water if possible.

J. If serious burn (partial or full-thickness burns) involves the hands or feet, always place a clean pad between toes or fingers when completing the dressing.

55

4. CARE FOR CHEMICAL BURNS

□

□

□ □ □

□

A. Protect yourself from exposure to hazardous materials

B. Wear gloves, eye protection, and respiratory protection

*C. Brush off dry powders Flush the burned area for at least 20 minutes. (If possible and it can be done quickly, try to identify any chemical powders before applying water)

D. Consider flushing with large amounts of water Apply a dry, clean dressing.

D. Continue flushing the contaminated area if applicable

E. Use caution not to contaminate uninjured areas when flushing or brushing

E. If dry lime is the agent causing the burn, do not flush with water. Instead use a dry dressing to brush the substance off the patient’s skin, hair, and clothing.

F. Remove any contaminated clothing or jewelry. G. Once this is done, you may flush the area with

water. H. Use caution not to contaminate uninjured areas

when flushing or brushing

5. CARE FOR ELECTRICAL BURNS

□

□

□

□

□

*A. Ensure safety before removing patient from the electrical source

*B. If the patient is still in contact with the electrical source or you are unsure, do not approach or touch the patient, contact power company

*C. Monitor the patient closely for respiratory and cardiac arrest

D. Treat the soft tissue injuries associated with the burn

*E. Look for both an entrance and exit wound

6. REASSESS □

*A. Reassess level of consciousness (AVPU), respiratory status, and patient response

Multiple burns will be treated as per procedures listed in patient assessment.

56

EARLY OR SUPERFICIAL FROSTBITE PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILLS

1. ASSESS FOR FROSTBITE AND COLD INJURIES

□

*A. Patient exhibits signs and symptoms of frostbite or cold injuries

2. ASSESS FOR EARLY OR SUPERFICIAL FROSTBITE

□

□ □ □

A. Blanching of the skin – palpitation of the skin in which normal color does not return

B. Loss of feeling and sensation in the injured area C. Skin remains soft D. If re-warmed, patient will feel a tingling

sensation

3. TREAT EARLY OR SUPERFICIAL INJURY

□ □

□ □ □

*A. Remove the patient from the environment B. Protect the cold injured extremity from further

injury *C. Remove wet or restrictive clothing D. Do not rub or massage E. Do not re-expose to the cold

4. REASSESS □

*A. Reassess level of consciousness (AVPU), respiratory status and patient response

57

LATE OR DEEP COLD INJURY

PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILLS

1. ASSESS FOR FROSTBITE AND COLD INJURIES

□

*A. Patient exhibits signs and symptoms of frostbite or cold injuries

2. ASSESS FOR LATE OR DEEP COLD INJURY

□ □ □

□ □

A. White, waxy skin B. Firm to frozen feeling upon palpitation C. If thawed or partially thawed, the skin may

appear flushed with areas of purple and blanching or mottled and cyanotic

D. Swelling may be present E. Blisters may be present

3. TREAT LATE OR DEEP COLD INJURY

□ □

□ □ □ □

*A. Remove the patient from the environment B. Protect the cold injured extremity from further

injury *C. Remove wet or restrictive clothing D. Remove jewelry E. Cover with dry clothing or dressings

*F. Do not: Break blisters Rub or massage area Apply heat Re-warm Allow the patient to walk on the affected

extremity

4. REASSESS □ *A. Reassess level of consciousness (AVPU),

respiratory status and patient response

58

MILD HYPERTHERMIA (HEAT) PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. ASSESS FOR HYPERTHERMIA

□ *A. Patient exhibits signs and symptoms of hyperthermia: Redness Muscular cramps Weakness or exhaustion Rapid heart rate Dizziness or faintness Altered mental status to unresponsive

2. PREVIOUS INTERVENTIONS

□ *A. Inquire about previous interventions attempted

3. ASSESS FOR MILD HYPERTHERMIA (HEAT EXHAUSTION)

□ *A. Check skin for: Normal to cool temperature Pale Moist

4. TREATMENT FOR MILD HYPERTHERMIA

□ □ □ □

□

*A. Place in a cool environment *B. Cool patient by fanning C. Put in supine position with legs elevated

*D. Offer drinking water if patient is responsive and not nauseated

E. If the patient is unresponsive or is vomiting, transport to the hospital

5. REASSESS □ *A. Reassess level of consciousness (AVPU),

respiratory status and patient response

59

SEVERE HYPERTHERMIA PROCEDURES CRITICAL SKILL

1. ASSESS FOR HYPERTHERMIA

□ *A. Patient exhibits signs and symptoms of hyperthermia: Redness Muscular cramps Weakness or exhaustion Rapid heart rate Dizziness or faintness Altered mental status to unresponsive

2. PREVIOUS INTERVENTIONS

□ *A. Inquire about previous interventions attempted

3. ASSESS FOR SEVERE HYPERTHERMIA (HEAT STROKE)

□ *A. Check skin for: Hot temperature Red Dry or moist

4. TREATMENT FOR SEVERE HYPERTHERMIA

□ □

□ □

□ □

*A. Place patient in a cool environment *B. Wet patient skin by applying water from sponge

or wet towels and fan C. Put in supine position with legs elevated

*D. Offer drinking water if patient is responsive and not nauseated

*E. Apply cool packs to neck, groin and armpits *F. Transport immediately

5. REASSESS □ *A. Reassess level of consciousness (AVPU),

respiratory status and patient response

60

FIRST AID STATEMENTS OF FACT

1. The complete chain of professionals and services linked together to provide emergency care is the EMS system. (Ch. 1 page 3)

2. The primary concern of an Emergency Medical Responder at an emergency is personal safety. (Ch. 1 page 11)

3. Providing emergency care using minimal equipment is one of the four main duties of an Emergency Medical Responder at the scene of an emergency. (Ch. 1 page 12-13)

4. An injured patient asks if he is hurt. Your response should be we will do everything we can to see that you are cared for properly. (Ch. 3 page 48)

5. Before providing care for a consenting adult, you should tell the patient what you are going to do. (CH. 2 page 23)

6. Unless otherwise stated, all references to body structures are made when the body is in anatomical position. (Ch. 4 page 56)

7. The term that can be used in describing the front of the heart is anterior. (Ch. 4 page 56)

8. During normal metabolism, the cell converts glucose into energy. (Ch. 5 page 88)

9. Certain conditions can cause the capillaries in the lungs to leak fluid. This is caused by an increase in permeability. (Ch. 5 page 89)

10. Cardiac output is a function of both stroke volume and heart rate. (Ch. 5 page 93)

11. When performing a one-rescuer drag, you should always drag the patient lengthwise. (Ch. 6 page 102)

12. Hepatitis B is the disease that causes the greatest number of deaths among health care workers. (Ch. 3 page 38)

13. Three rescuers is the minimum number of rescuers recommended to perform a direct ground lift. (Ch. 6 page 104)

14. Ask one question at a time, and allow the patient ample time to respond is the best approach to interviewing a patient. (Ch. 7 page 126)

61

15. A verbal transfer of care report does not typically include mileage from scene to hospital. (Ch. 7 page 128)

16. The patient’s vital signs and medical history are examples of patient data. (Ch. 8 page 135)

17. A Patient’s name is not considered part of the minimum data set documenting an EMS call. (Ch. 8 page 136)

18. The moment when both heartbeat and respirations stop, a patient is referred to as clinically dead. (Ch. 9 page 144)

19. Inspiration (inhalation) occurs when the volume inside the chest cavity increases

and the lungs expand. (Ch. 9 page 143)

20. Jaw-thrust maneuver is recommended for opening the airway of a patient with possible spine injury. (Ch. 9 page 148)

21. Mouth-to-mask is the technique recommended as the first choice for a solo rescuer to provide rescue breaths. (Ch. 9 page 149)

22. When positioning a pocket face mask, the base of the mask should rest between the patient’s lower lip and the chin. (Ch. 9 page 167)

23. The recommended duration of a breath delivered to an adult patient who is in respiratory arrest is 1 second. (Ch. 10 page 187)

24. While performing mouth-to-mask ventilations on an adult, the recommended rate is one breath delivery every 5-6 seconds. (Ch. 9 page 151)

25. During rescue breathing, it is possible for air to enter the patient’s stomach. The best way to minimize this problem is to reduce the force of ventilation. (Ch. 9 page 154)

26. One sign of a partial airway obstruction is gurgling. It may be caused by fluids in the upper airway. (Ch. 9 page 155)

27. A patient who is unable to cough with a partial airway obstruction should be cared for as if he had a complete obstruction. (Ch. 9 page 155)

28. For an unresponsive adult with a complete air obstruction, you should begin chest compressions. (Ch. 9 page 155)

29. An oropharyngeal airway should be used on non-breathing patients who are unresponsive with no gag reflex. (Ch. 9 page 160)

62

30. When measuring for fit, a properly sized oropharyngeal airway will extend from the center of a patient’s mouth to the angle of the lower jaw. (Ch. 9 page 161)

31. It is appropriate to use a nasopharyngeal airway on unresponsive patient who has suffered head and facial trauma. (Ch. 9 page 162)

32. One function of the regulator on an oxygen tank is to reduce tank pressure. (Ch. 10 page 176)

33. The appropriate flow rate for a nasal cannula is 1-6 LPM. (Ch. 10 page 180)

34. The minimum flow rate for a nonrebreather mask is 10 LPM. (Ch. 10 page 181)

35. The most appropriate location to check for a pulse on an unresponsive adult is the neck. (Ch. 11 page 193)

36. If respiratory arrest and cardiac arrest occur the Brain cells begin to die in several minutes. (Ch. 11 page 191)

37. When assessing a pulse on a suspected cardiac arrest victim, you should feel for no more than 10 seconds. (Ch. 11 page 193)

38. During CPR, compressions should be delivered at a rate of 100-120 per minute. (Ch. 11 page 196)

39. The correct depth of compressions for the adult patient during CPR is at least

two inches. (Ch. 11 page 196)

40. During one-rescuer CPR on an adult, ventilations are delivered two breaths for every 30 compressions. (Ch. 11 page 197)

41. When caring for a patient in cardiac arrest, interruptions in chest compressions should be kept to 10 seconds or less. (Ch. 11 page 197)

42. The most common type of rhythm that an AED will help correct is ventricular fibrillation. (Ch. 11 page 207)

43. The upper chest electrode pad is placed on the right side of the chest. (Ch. 11 page 209)

44. You are caring for a victim of cardiac arrest and just delivered a shock with the AED. You should then continue chest compressions. (Ch. 11 page 210)

45. The most common operating problem with an AED is improperly attached electrode pad. (Ch. 11 page 211)

46. When performing two-rescuer CPR on an adult, rescuers should switch roles every two minutes. (Ch. 11 page 202)

63

47. After a shock is delivered using an AED, the Emergency Medical Responder should immediately continue CPR. (Ch. 11 page 210)

48. A patient initially appears to be unresponsive but opens his eyes when you introduce yourself to him. Using the AVPU scale, verbal is how you would classify this patient’s mental status. (Ch. 12 page 223)

49. Popliteal is considered a central, rather than peripheral, pulse. (Ch. 12 page 225)

50. A pulse rate above 100 beats per minute is considered abnormal for an adult. (Ch. 12 page 226)

51. The term perfusion is best defined as the circulation of oxygenated blood throughout the body. (Ch. 12 page 221)

52. Both the systolic and diastolic pressures are measured when blood pressure taken by auscultation is correct. (Ch. 12 page 229-230)

53. A standard blood pressure cuff is used to obtain a blood pressure reading in the brachial artery. (Ch. 12 page 227-228)

54. For most adults, a systolic blood pressure below 90 mm Hg is considered abnormal. (Ch. 12 page 228)

55. The purpose of the primary assessment is to identify and correct life-threating problems. (Ch. 13 page 240)

56. The best source of information to determine what is wrong with a responsive patient comes from the patient. (Ch. 13 page 260)

57. The first two steps in the primary assessment are to form a general impression and assess mental status. (Ch. 13 page 250)

58. During primary assessment, you should check for uncontrolled bleeding. (Ch. 13 page 255)

59. A sign is what you see, hear, feel, and smell when examining the patient. (Ch. 13 page 240)

60. A symptom is what the patient tells you is wrong. (Ch. 13 page 240)

61. When assessing a pulse, you should assess for rate, strength, and rhythm. (Ch. 12 Ch. 12 page 225)

62. When assessing respirations, you should assess for depth, rate, sound and ease of breathing. (Ch. 12 page 223)

64

63. A respiratory rate of less than 10 breaths per minute in an adult likely indicates a serious condition. (Ch. 12 page 225)

64. The least likely signs and symptoms to be suggestive of cardiac compromise slurred speech. (Ch. 14 page 277)

65. After the heart pumps blood out of the left ventricle, the blood next travels to the Aorta. (Ch. 14 page 276)

66. A patient complaining of chest pain and showing signs of possible heart attack should be placed in a position of comfort. (Ch. 14 page 283)

67. Respiratory rate of 6 with shallow tidal volume is most indicative of inadequate breathing in an adult. (Ch. 15 page 293)

68. The structure that lies between the mouth and the top of the lungs is the trachea. (page 290)

69. A responsive patient complaining of breathing difficulty will most likely benefit from being placed into sitting upright positions. (Ch. 15 page 293)

70. An obstruction or rupture of a cerebral blood vessel, resulting in a disruption of blood flow to the brain best describes the pathophysiology of a stroke. (Ch. 16 page 310)

71. In late or deep localized cold injury (frostbite), the skin usually appears white and waxy. (Ch. 17 page 342)

72. A patient with an altered mental status and hot, dry skin should be suspected of suffering from heat stroke. (Ch. 17 page 336)

73. Treatment for hypothermia should include all of the following removing any wet clothing, preventing the patient from moving as much as possible, and placing a blanket over and under the patient. (Ch. 17 page 339)

74. Heat loss caused by direct contact between the body and a cool object is called conduction. (Ch. 17 page 334)

75. Difficulty breathing or swallowing are signs of an allergic reaction to a bee sting would be an indication of anaphylaxis. (Ch. 17 page 334)

76. Blood is carried away from the heart to the rest of the body via the arteries. (Ch. 18 page 357)

77. The exchange of nutrients and waste products between the blood and the body’s cells takes place at the level of the capillaries. (Ch. 18 page 358)

65

78. Six liters of blood are contained within the typical adult. (Ch. 18 page 357)

79. The purpose of an occlusive dressing is to create an airtight seal over a wound that penetrates a body cavity. (Ch. 18 page 363)

80. A superficial burn is an injury to the epidermis. (Ch. 18 page 379)

81. According to the rule of nines, a burn to the head and neck regions would be classified as 9% of the body surface area in an adult patient. (Ch. 18 page 380)

82. The proper care for a patient with serious burn covering a large surface area will include keeping the burned area clean by covering it with a dry dressing. (Ch. 18 page 382)

83. Your patient has splashed an unknown chemical into her eye. You should flush her eyes with water at least 20 minutes. (Ch. 18 page 384)

84. You should expect a patient with severe internal bleeding to present signs and symptoms of shock. (Ch. 18 page 366)

85. Distributive shock is best described as excessive dilation of blood vessels. (Ch. 19 page 392)

86. All of the following are signs of early, or compensated, shock altered mental

status, cool and pale skin, and increased pulse rate. (Ch. 19 page 395)

87. Check distal CSM; immobilize the foreman; immobilize the elbow and wrist; recheck CSM are the most appropriate steps when treating a musculoskeletal injury to the forearm. (Ch. 20 page 422-423)

88. Injuries to the femur are considered serious because they can result in severe, life threatening bleeding. (Ch. 20 page 426)

89. Weakness of left arm and hand are signs and symptoms are most indicative of spine injury. (Ch. 21 page 441)

90. A concussion is best defined as injury to the soft tissue of the brain. (Ch. 21 page 437)

91. Of the following, the most common complication of a closed chest injury involving broken ribs is shallow, inadequate breathing. (Ch. 22 page 455)

92. The recommended method to stabilize an isolated chest injury is to splint the chest using bulky dressings or towels. (Ch. 22 page 455)

66

93. A pneumothorax occurs when a ruptured lung allows the chest cavity to fill with air. (Ch. 22 page 456)

94. Paradoxical chest wall movement suggests multiple broken ribs. (Ch. 22 page 457)

95. All of the following are ways the respiratory system is affected by aging process heightened ability to detect low levels of oxygen in the blood, increasing weakness of respiratory muscles, and loss of lung elasticity and collapse of small airway structures. (Ch. 24 page 511)

96. The idea behind a triage system is to do the most good for the largest number of people. (Ch. 27 page 566)

97. Apply a moist sterile dressing over the exposed organs and then cover with plastic when a patient has an open wound of the abdomen, and his intestines have been exposed. (Ch. 21 page 464)

98. You find blood freely flowing from a neck wound. As soon as is practical after applying direct pressure, you should apply an occlusive dressing. (Ch. 18 page 378)

99. When breathing and circulation stop, irreversible damage in the patient’s brain is likely to begin within 4 to 6 minutes. (Ch. 7 page 123)

100. An object is loosely impaled in your patient’s cheek. Its point has broken through the cheek wall into the mouth, and the wound is actively bleeding. You should remove the object and carefully place dressings on both sides of the cheek. (Ch. 18 page 373)

Note: all test material comes from Emergency Medical Responder First on Scene 10th edition by Christopher J. Le Baudour; published by Pearson; copyright 2016

67

1. The adequate flow of oxygenated blood to all cells of the body is called:

a. Circulation b. Perfusion c. Compensation d. Systole

2. When assessing a patient’s respirations, you must determine rate, depth, and:

a. Regularity. b. Count of expirations. c. Ease. d. Count of inspirations.

3. The five most important vital signs are pulse, respirations, blood pressure, pupils, and:

a. Oxygen saturation. b. Skin signs. c. Mental status. d. Capillary refill.

4. The first set of vital signs obtained on any patient is referred to as the ____ set.

a. Historical b. Ongoing c. Baseline d. Serial

5. What can be assessed by watching and feeling the chest and abdomen move

during breathing?

a. Pulse rate b. Blood pressure c. Skin signs d. Respiratory rate

6. Characteristics of a pulse include:

a. Rate, depth, and ease. b. Rate, strength, and rhythm. c. Rate, depth, and strength. d. Rate, ease, and quality.

7. The most appropriate location to obtain a pulse for an unresponsive adult is the ___ artery.

68

a. Brachial b. Femoral c. Carotid d. Radial

8. What are the two pulse points that are referred to as central pulses?

a. Radial and tibial b. Carotid and femoral c. Femoral and brachial d. Brachial and carotid

9. As blood pressure drops, perfusion is most likely to:

a. Increase. b. Decrease. c. Fluctuate. d. Remain the same.

10. Skin that is bluish in color is called:

a. Pale. b. Flushed. c. Cyanotic. d. Jaundice

11. The term diaphoretic refers to:

a. Pupil reaction. b. Skin temperature. c. Heart rhythm. d. Skin moisture.

12. When going from a well-lit room to a dark one, you would the expect the normal pupil to:

a. Not react. b. Dilate. c. Constrict. d. Fluctuate.

13. Which one of the following is most accurate when describing a palpated blood pressure?

69

a. It provides only the diastolic pressure. b. It must be taken on a responsive patient. c. It can be obtained without a stethoscope. d. It can be obtained with a BP cuff.

14. A respiratory rate that is less than ____ for an adult should be considered inadequate.

a. 4 b. 6 c. 8 d. 10

15. The pressure inside the arteries each time the heart contracts is referred to as the ____ pressure.

a. Diastolic b. Pulse c. Systolic d. Mean

16. A ____ is something the Emergency Medical Responder can see or measure during the patient assessment.

a. Symptom b. History c. Sign d. Chief complaint

17. The term trending is best defined as the:

a. Ability to spot changes in a patient’s condition over time. b. Name given to the last set of vital signs taken on a patient. c. Transfer of care from one level of care to another. d. The ability to improve a patient’s condition over time.

18. After arriving on the scene, but before making patient contact, you should:

a. Perform a primary assessment. b. Contact medical direction. c. Perform a secondary assessment. d. Take BSI precautions.

19. There are six components to the primary assessment, beginning with:

a. Assessing the patient’s mental status.

70

b. Assessing the patient’s airway. c. Forming a general impression. d. Evaluating patient’s circulation.

20. The assessment of a patient’s mental status or responsiveness includes using the ____ scale.

a. AVPU b. ABC c. SAMPLE d. BP-DOC

21. Which one of the following statements best describes the relationship between a heart attack and sudden cardiac arrest? a. A heart attack and sudden cardiac arrest are the same thing. b. Sudden cardiac arrest is a leading cause of heart attack. c. Heart arrack results in tissue damage; sudden cardiac arrest does not. d. Heart attack is a leading cause of sudden cardiac arrest.

22. Blood that is returning to the heart from the lungs enters the heart at the: a. Right atrium. b. Left atrium. c. Right ventricle. d. Left ventricle.

23. You are caring for a patient with difficulty breathing. She states that she has a history of asthma. You understand asthma to be a disease of the: a. Upper airway. b. Lower airway. c. Alveoli. d. Trachea.

24. The respiratory control center located deep within the brain primarily monitors the level of ____ to maintain proper respiratory rate and volume.

71

a. Carbon dioxide. b. Carbon monoxide. c. Oxygen. d. Glucose.

25. Which medical condition listed below causes inflammation of the bronchioles and excess mucus production within the airways? It is also characterized by a productive cough. a. Asthma. b. Bronchitis. c. Emphysema. d. Hyperventilation.

26. Which one of the medical conditions listed below results in the loss of elasticity of the lungs and the retention of carbon dioxide? a. Asthma. b. Bronchitis. c. Emphysema d. Hyperventilation.

27. Altered metal status is best defined as a patient who:

a. Is unresponsive. b. Cannot speak properly. c. Cannot tell what day it is. d. Is not alert or responsive to surroundings.

28. A patient who is unresponsive and having full body muscle contractions is likely experiencing:

a. Stroke. b. Seizure. c. Heart attack. d. Respiratory distress.

29. Which one of the following is the best example of appropriate care for a seizure

patient?

72

a. Keep him from injuring himself and place him in the recovery position following the seizure.

b. Place him in a semi-sitting position and apply oxygen following the seizure. c. Place him in a prone position and provide oxygen by nasal cannula. d. Restrain him and assist ventilations with a bag-mask device.

30. Which one of the following is NOT evaluated as part of the Cincinnati Prehospital Stroke Scale?

a. Abnormal speech b. Equal circulation c. Facial droop d. Arm drift

31. Activated charcoal is only recommended for what type of poisoning?

a. Ingested b. Inhaled c. Topical d. Absorbed

32. What is the most commonly abused chemical in the United States?

a. Arsenic b. Amyl nitrate c. Butane d. Alcohol

33. A diabetic who forgets to take her insulin and continues to eat a meal will most likely become:

a. Hypoglycemic. b. Responsive. c. Hyperglycemic d. Short of breath.

34. In which one of the following situations is the patient losing body heat primarily by conduction?

a. A 66-year-old male is found lying on the frozen ground without a coat.

73

b. A 14-year-old male is wearing wet clothing after falling out of his boat while fishing.

c. A 23-year-old female is outside in cool, windy weather. d. An elderly female patient is breathing into the cool night air.

35. More serious heat-related injuries should be suspected when the patient presents with;

a. Feeling lightheaded. b. Muscle cramps. c. Hot, dry, skin. d. Weakness.

36. Your patient is a 34-year-old male who has been working outside in a hot, humid climate. He is alert and oriented, complaining of feeling weak and dizzy. His skin is cool and moist, and he has a heart rate of 104, a blood pressure of 110/70, and respirations of 16. You should:

a. Place cold packs at the groin, armpits, and neck. b. Move the patient to a cool area in the shade. c. Offer the patient some salt tablets. d. Wet the skin, turn the air conditioning on high, and vigorously fan the

patient.

37. A patient who is experiencing an abnormally low body core temperature is said to be:

a. Hyperthermic b. Cyanotic c. Hypothermic d. Hyperglycemic

38. An injury characterized by the freezing or near freezing of a body part is known as:

a. Frostbite. b. Frostnip. c. Hypothermia. d. Cold bite.

39. All of the following are appropriate steps in a management of a patient with a generalized cold emergency, EXCEPT:

a. Removing the patient from the cold environment. b. Protecting him from further heat loss.

74

c. Providing warm liquids to drink d. Monitoring his vital signs.

40. A patient who presents with warm, moist skin; weakness; and nausea is likely experiencing:

a. Heat exhaustion. b. Heat stroke. c. Heat cramps. d. Mild heat stroke.

41. Your patient was hiking and was bitten on the ankle by a rattlesnake. When caring for this patient, you should:

a. Keep the foot lower than the level of the patient’s heart. b. Elevate the foot on pillows. c. Apply a tourniquet above the bite. d. Apply ice to the area of the bite.

42. Which one of the following is NOT a typical characteristic of arterial bleeding?

a. Blood spurts from the wound. b. Blood flows steadily from the wound. c. The color of the blood is bright red. d. Blood loss is often profuse in a short period of time.

43. When attempting to control bleeding, which one of the following procedures will follow direct pressure?

a. Indirect pressure b. Tourniquet c. Elevation combined with direct pressure d. Pressure points

44. Most cases of external bleeding can be controlled by:

a. Applying direct pressure. b. Using a tourniquet. c. Securing a pressure bandage. d. Applying a clotting agent.

45. The material placed directly over a wound to help control bleeding is called a(n):

a. Bandage. b. Elastic bandage. c. Occlusive dressing.

75

d. Dressing.

46. The tearing loose or the tearing off of a large flap of skin describes which one of the following types of wound?

a. Abrasion b. Amputation c. Laceration d. Avulsion

47. When providing care for an open injury to the cheek in which the object has entered through the skin into the mouth, you must ensure an open airway and:

a. Removed the impaled object. b. Turn the patient’s head to one side. c. Dress and bandage the outside of the wound. d. Place dressings in the mouth.

48. When providing care for an open injury to the external ear:

a. Pack the ear canal. b. Use a cotton swab to clear the ear canal. c. Wash out the ear canal. d. Apply dressings and bandage in place.

49. Which one of the following patients is most at risk for multisystem trauma? a. 16-year-old who fell four feet from a ladder. b. 66-year-old female ejected from a vehicle rollover. c. 44-year-old male whose foot was crushed by a forklift. d. 27-year-old struck in the head by a baseball bat.

50. When caring for a patient with severe burns, you must take BSI precautions and then: a. Stop the burning process. b. Prevent further contamination. c. Flush only large burn areas. d. Remove jewelry.

51. As a member of the EMS team, your primary role is one of:

a. patient care.

b. safety.

c. transport.

76

d. documentation.

52. What type of consent is necessary from responsive, competent adult patients?

a. Implied

b. Applied

c. Absentee

d. Expressed

53. The best definition of the term stressor is anything that:

a. produces wear and tear on the body's resources.

b. consumes the attention of the person experiencing stress.

c. puts pressure on the body.

d. causes significant behavioral changes.

54. Which one of the following statements about critical incident stress is MOST

accurate?

a. It is rarely caused by a single incident.

b. It can be the result of many incidents over a long period of time.

c. It affects all people the same way.

d. It can always be avoided with proper preparation.

55. The _____ separates the thoracic cavity from the abdominal cavity.

a. pelvic wall

b. midline

c. diaphragm

d. stomach

56. The _____ cavity contains the liver and part of the large intestine.

a. Pelvic

b. abdominal

c. thoracic

d. cranial

57. Proper body mechanics is best defined as:

a. properly using your body to facilitate a lift or move.

b. using a minimum of three people for any lift.

c. contracting the body's muscles to lift and move things.

77

d. lifting with your back and not your legs.

58. The load on your back is minimized if you can keep the weight you are carrying:

a. as close to your body as possible.

b. at least six inches in front of you.

c. at least 18 inches in front of you.

d. as low as possible.

59. The word communicate is best defined as:

a. expressing oneself to another.

b. talking to another person verbally.

c. an interchange of ideas or information.

d. understanding what another person is saying.

60. The words and sounds that make up a language is a description of which type of

communication?

a. Verbal

b. Nonverbal

c. Written

d. Visual

61. Which one of the following improves ventilations delivered by way of a bag-

mask device?

a. Inserting an oropharyngeal airway

b. Applying suction for four to six minutes

c. Alternating chest thrusts and squeezing the bag

d. Combining finger sweeps with a mouth-to-mouth technique

62. You have just made two attempts to ventilate an unresponsive child with an

airway obstruction. Your next step is to:

a. begin chest compressions.

b. continue to ventilate.

c. perform five chest thrusts.

78

d. provide back slaps.

63. Which one of the following best describes the oxygen consumption of a normally

functioning human being?

a. The body requires a constant supply of oxygen at 79%.

b. The human body needs a minimum of 10% oxygen to survive.

c. The body exhales an average of 21% carbon dioxide with each breath.

d. The average exhalation contains an oxygen concentration of between 10%

and 16%.

64. The pressure gauge of a full oxygen cylinder will display approximately _____

psi.

a. 500

b. 1,000

c. 1,500

d. 2,000

65. One of the most common consequences of overinflating a patient during rescue

breaths is:

a. a ruptured lung.

b. inadequate chest rise.

c. gastric distention.

d. A weak mask seal.

66. You are caring for an adult patient who was found unresponsive. You observe

only gasping respirations. What is the most appropriate next step?

a. Open the airway and give a breath.

b. Call 911 and get an AED.

c. Begin chest compressions.

d. Attach the AED.

67. For most patients, an Emergency Medical Responder's assessment begins with

performing a scene size-up followed by:

a. a secondary assessment.

b. a primary assessment.

c. obtaining vital signs.

d. determining the nature of illness.

79

68. In a SAMPLE history, the E represents:

a. EKG results.

b. evaluation of the neck and spine.

c. events leading to illness or injury.

d. evidence of airway obstruction.

69. The myocardium receives its blood supply from:

a. coronary arteries.

b. myocardial arteries.

c. the conduction pathway.

d. the aorta.

70. You have arrived on the scene of an unresponsive female who is pulseless and

apneic. You should:

a. begin CPR.

b. administer oxygen.

c. obtain a set of vital signs.

d. place her in the recovery position.

71. Your patient has been in respiratory distress for approximately 30 minutes. Your

assessment reveals pale skin and cyanosis of the nail beds. These are signs of:

a. respiratory failure.

b. asthma.

c. hypoxia.

d. respiratory arrest.

72. You are caring for a patient complaining of shortness of breath. Her respiratory

rate is 24 with good tidal volume. Following the primary assessment, you

should:

a. provide supplemental oxygen.

b. take a set of vital signs.

c. perform a rapid secondary assessment.

d. place her in the recovery position.

80

73. One of the best techniques for dealing with a patient experiencing a behavioral

emergency is to:

a. not let the patient know what you are doing.

b. not believe a thing the patient says.

c. speak in a calm and reassuring voice.

d. acknowledge the "voices" he is hearing.

74. Your patient is presenting with an altered mental status and a history of diabetes.

He states that he took his normal dose of insulin this morning but has not had

anything to eat. His most likely problem is:

a. hyperglycemia.

b. anaphylaxis.

c. hypoglycemia.

d. a stroke.

75. Once a seizure has ended, the patient is said to be in the _____ state.

a. REM

b. postictal

c. syncopal

d. recovery

76. You are caring for a person who fell from a rope swing, landed in the water, and

is now unresponsive. She has a large laceration on the top of her head. You

should:

a. suspect spine injury.

b. begin CPR in the water.

c. drag her by one arm to shore.

d. wait for EMS before beginning care.

77. You are caring for a patient with a severe soft-tissue injury to the lower leg. You

have exposed the wound. What should you do next?

a. Apply direct pressure.

b. Remove debris from the wound.

c. Care for shock.

d. Elevate the extremity.

78. All of the following are signs or symptoms of internal bleeding EXCEPT:

81

a. increased pulse rate

b. decreasing blood pressure

c. decreasing pulse rate.

d. pale skin color.

79. Your patient has a large open wound to his neck. You have controlled bleeding

with direct pressure, so you should then:

a. pack the inside of the wound with clean dressings.

b. pour sterile saline over the wound.

c. cover the wound with a dry, clean dressing.

d. cover the wound with an occlusive dressing.

80. All of the following are signs of shock EXCEPT:

a. increased pulse rate.

b. decreasing blood pressure.

c. pink, warm, moist skin.

d. altered mental status.

81. When the body suffers a significant loss of blood, which type of shock is most

likely to occur?

a. Anaphylactic

b. Cardiogenic

c. Hemorrhagic

d. Septic

82. Which one of the following is NOT one of the primary causes of shock?

a. Dilated blood vessels

b. Restricted movement

c. Severe fluid loss

d. Low levels of oxygen in the blood

83. Which one of the following would NOT be considered appropriate when caring

for a suspected fracture?

82

a. Cut away clothing to expose the injury site.

b. "Pop" possible dislocations back into place.

c. Assess circulation, sensation, and motor function.

d. Immobilize the joint above and below the injury site.

84. The process of immobilizing an injury using a device such as a piece of wood,

cardboard, or folded blanket is called:

a. immobilization.

b. traction.

c. splinting.

d. manual stabilization.

85. When properly applied, a sling and swathe will adequately immobilize a:

a. wrist.

b. forearm.

c. shoulder.

d. knee.

86. What is the most important initial step that you can take when caring for a

person with a suspected spine injury?

a. Assess the patient for circulation, sensation, and movement.

b. Determine mechanism of injury

c. Transport the patient to nearest trauma center.

d. Manually stabilize patient’s head and neck.

87. Combative behavior, abnormal breathing patterns, and repetitive questions are

all signs of a(n):

a. cervical-spine injury.

b. unresponsive person.

c. peripheral nervous system trauma.

d. Injury to the head.

88. What are the two main components of the central nervous system?

a. Peripheral and central nerves

83

b. Discs and vertebrae

c. Brain and spine

d. Spine and nerves

89. You are caring for a patient who was struck in the lateral chest by a blunt object.

You palpate a flail segment on the right lateral chest area. This type of injury is

most likely to affect the:

a. patient's ability to breathe normally.

b. heart and lungs.

c. patient's pulse rate.

d. patient's ability to cough.

90. In the case of an open chest wound, place an occlusive dressing over the open

wound and then:

a. cover it loosely with a cloth bandage.

b. tape it on three or four sides.

c. hold it in place with a gloved hand.

d. pack the opening with clean gauze.

91. The purpose of placing an occlusive dressing over an open chest wound is to:

a. control the bleeding.

b. keep chest contents from spilling out.

c. keep air from entering the chest cavity.

d. make it easier for the patient to breathe.

92. The loss of mobility is a common complaint among the elderly and can lead to

other problems, such as:

a. skeletal fractures.

b. hearing loss.

c. depression.

d. nearsightedness.

93. The inability to retain urine or feces is called:

a. dementia.

b. aphasia.

84

c. priapism.

d. incontinence.

94. Age-related changes in the musculoskeletal system can lead to changes in

posture, range of motion, and:

a. awareness.

b. medication usage.

c. mental status.

d. balance.

95. The best way to approach a hazardous scene is to:

a. do only what you feel comfortable doing.

b. wear protective gear only if needed.

c. Make safety your first consideration before entering.

d. Get as close as possible to assess the scene.

96. Which one of the following best defines both simple access and complex access?

a. Neither simple access nor complex access requires specialized tools.

b. Simple and complex access both require special equipment.

c. Simple access sometimes requires special equipment; complex access often

does.

d. Simple access does not require equipment, though complex access does.

97. If you find yourself needing to exit a smoke-filled environment, you should:

a. stay close to the floor and crawl to safety.

b. run out of the building.

c. stop, drop, and roll.

d. not exit until you find the patient.

98. A multiple-casualty incident (MCI) involves _____ victims.

a. more than one

b. more than two

c. fewer than 10

85

d. fewer than 100

99. The triage system was developed to assist in determining those victims needing:

a. standard care.

b. immediate transport.

c. immediate care.

d. long-term care.

100. Triage is a process of sorting patients into categories and prioritizing their

medical care and transport based on:

a. number of injuries and medical conditions.

b. age, weight, and height of the patient.

c. proximity to the mechanism of injury.

d. severity of injuries and medical conditions.

86

Answer Key

1. B Ch. 11 #4 2. C Ch. 11 #5 3. B Ch. 11 #6 4. C Ch. 11 #7 5. D Ch. 11 #8 6. B Ch. 11 #9 7. C Ch. 11 #10 8. B Ch. 11 #11 9. B Ch. 11 #12 10. C Ch. 11 #13 11. D Ch. 11 #14 12. B Ch. 11 #15 13. C Ch. 11 #16 14. D Ch. 11 #17 15. C Ch. 11 #18 16. C Ch. 11 #19 17. A Ch. 11 #20 18. D Ch. 12 #2 19. C Ch. 12 #3 20. A Ch. 12 #4 21. D Ch. 13 #6 22. B Ch. 13 #1 23. B Ch. 14 #1 24. A Ch. 14 #2 25. B Ch. 14 #7 26. C Ch. 14 #10 27. D Ch. 15 #1 28. B Ch. 15 #2 29. A Ch. 15 #3 30. B Ch. 15 #6 31. A Ch. 15 #8 32. D Ch. 15 #10 33. C Ch. 15 #11 34. A Ch. 16 #1 35. C Ch. 16 #2 36. B Ch. 16 #3 37. C Ch. 16 #4

87

38. A Ch. 16 #5 39. C Ch. 16 #6 40. A Ch. 16 #7 41. A Ch. 16 #8 42. B Ch. 17 #1 43. C Ch. 17 #2 44. A Ch. 17 #3 45. D Ch. 17 #4 46. D Ch. 17 #5 47. A Ch. 17 #7 48. D Ch. 17 #8 49. B Ch. 17 #9 50. A Ch. 17 #10 51. B Ch 1 #10 52. D Ch 2 #3 53. A Ch 3 #6 54. B Ch 3 #11 55. C Ch 4 #15 56. B Ch 4 #17 57. A Ch 5 #1 58. A Ch 5 #5 59. C Ch 6 #1 60. A Ch 6 #2 61. A Ch 8 #9 62. A Ch 8 #18 63. D Ch 9 #2 64. D Ch 9 #5 65. C Ch 9 #15 66. B Ch 10 #2 67. B Ch 12 #1 68. C Ch 12 #5 69. A Ch 13 #4 70. A Ch 13 #7 71. C Ch 14 #3 72. A Ch 14 #4 73. C Ch 15 #5 74. C Ch 15 #7 75. B Ch 15 #13 76. A Ch 16 #10 77. A Ch 17 #6 78. C Ch 17 #11 79. D Ch 17 #12 80. C Ch 18 #1

88

81. C Ch 18 #2 82. B Ch 18 #5 83. B Ch 19 #3 84. C Ch 19 #8 85. C Ch 19 #12 86. D Ch 20 #1 87. D Ch 20 #5 88. C Ch 20 #7 89. A Ch 21 #1 90. B Ch 21 #2 91. C Ch 21 #5 92. C Ch 24 #4 93. D Ch 24 #5 94. B Ch 24 #10 95. C Ch 25 #1 96. D Ch 25 #5 97. A Ch 25 #12 98. A Ch 26 #1 99. C Ch 26 #3 100. D Ch 26 #4

SECTION III

2018

Bench Bio Pak

240-R RULES

2018 BENCH BIOPAK 240-R CONTEST RULES

INDEX

Section III

Title Page

Rules Governing 2018 Bench BioPak 240R Contest and Interpretations of Discount Cards ...................................................................................... 1

Statements of Fact (Bench Contest) ...................................................................................... 10

Identification of Parts ............................................................................................................. 19

i

1

RULES GOVERNING 2018 BENCH BIOPAK 240-R CONTEST AND INTERPRETATIONS OF DISCOUNT CARDS

1. Each participant must be under guard before the start of the Contest in a location assigned by the Chief Judge and must remain continuously under guard until time to work the problem. Information for bench problem design is available on the MSHA website WWW.MSHA.Gov in the Mine Rescue section under 240R Designers Resources. Participants under guard must be in a location where they will be unable to obtain any information concerning the problem to be worked. Any participant receiving information concerning a Contest problem prior to starting to work the problem will be disqualified by the Chief Judge and the Assistant Chief Judge. No person, except guards and Contest officials assigned to give the written examination, will be allowed to communicate with any participant under guard. Those who have performed will not be permitted to communicate with any participant awaiting their turn to perform.

2. Any indication of receiving unauthorized information during the working of the problem may result in disqualification as determined by the Chief Judge and the Assistant Chief Judge. No one except judges, Contest officials, and working participants will be permitted in the work area, unless special approval is given by the Chief Judge. Communication with bench participants, except for the judges, is prohibited. News media and photographers who wish to be in the working area must receive permission from the Director and be accompanied by a Contest official.

3. Any bench participant not in place and ready at the time specified will be disqualified from the Contest.

4. The bench participant will be provided with two BIOPAK 240-R apparatus (one disassembled, one assembled), a Test kit, a stopwatch, leak detector fluid and a tool kit. Only the tools and fluid provided will be used for testing and assembly of the apparatus. The work at the bench will consist of (1) a visual examination of a disassembled BIOPAK 240-R and the proper assembly and preparation for use in rescue work. This will include correcting any predetermined problem(s) so that the apparatus is in proper working order. This visual examination, correcting predetermined problem(s), and proper assembly can be done at any time allowed for working of the problem. (2) Test the assembled BIOPAK 240-R apparatus with a Test Kit, and correct the predetermined problem(s) so that the apparatus is in proper working condition. Except for removing the face piece storage plug

2

from the breathing hoses, the assembled BIOPAK 240-R apparatus cannot be disassembled to look for problems, until the apparatus fails a test. When testing is completed on the assembled BIOPAK 240-R apparatus, the hoses shall be removed from the tester, connected to the face piece, and the upper housing installed. This shall be done before the clock is stopped.

5. Spare parts to correct the predetermined problem(s) will be provided once the bench participant has specifically identified the problem. This will require the participant to point out the exact location of the deficiency. (Example: High pressure leak in circuit. Participant will identify the location of the leak.)

6. When an unplanned deficiency is encountered with the apparatus, the participant will be notified by the judges that the deficiency is not part of the problem. The judge will stop the clock, and any time used to correct the deficiency will not be charged to the working time. However, the process of verbal elimination shall not be used by the bench participant to find the predetermined problem(s). If it becomes obvious to the judges that this is occurring, the first offense will result in a warning, the second offense a discount, and the third offense could result in disqualification as determined by the Chief Judge. (Example: Participant verbally identifies a deficiency with every part of the Facemask when only one predetermined problem exists.)

7. The bench participant will not be allowed to bring any materials, written information, or records to the work site.

8. Tests will be performed in sequence on the assembled BIOPAK 240-R

apparatus as outlined in the rules using the standard test procedures with the Test kit as outlined in the BIOPAK Model 240-R User Manual, B5-06-6000-14-0, REV-K, and Benchman Manual, B5-06-6000-15-0 REV-N.

9. A maximum of 30 minutes will be allowed to complete the problem. The bench judge will inform the participant when he has five minutes remaining to work the problem. At the completion of the problem, the judge(s) and the participant will note the working time of the problem with the official timekeeper. Work done after the clock is stopped will not be recognized.

10. Manually abusing or intentionally over or under pressurizing the Tester or Apparatus substantially will be considered abusing the equipment. If the participant is observed abusing the Test kit, the first offense will result in a

warning, the second offense will result in a discount, and the third offense could result in disqualification as determined by the Chief Judge.

3

A. Written Examination of Bench Participant

1. The written examination shall consist of 30 questions. Twenty questions for the written examination will be taken verbatim from the Statements of Facts which will be multiple choice with three choices and each blank shall represent a key word with no more than two consecutive blanks per statement. Ten questions will be taken verbatim from identification of parts. Intentional misspelling of words by the test developer will not be allowed. Multiple choice answers with numbers will either be in the form of numbers written out or numerical. Either version is acceptable. “None of the above” is not acceptable as one of the answers. Thirty minutes will be allowed for the written examination.

2. In special circumstances, individual bench participants may be given oral instead of written examinations by at least two judges. Requests for consideration shall be presented to the Director of the Contest at the time of registration.

3. Bench participants will be separated to the extent possible, and every

effort will be made to prohibit discussion of questions and answers among the bench participants.

B. Miscellaneous

1. In the event of ties in the Bench Contest, the number of discounts at bench will be the first tie breaker; the number of discounts on written examination will be the second tie breaker; and the official working time at bench in minutes and seconds will be the third tie breaker.

2. The bench participant and trainer will report to a designated location to review and prepare protests within one hour of notification. Twenty minutes will be given to review and prepare written protests. All protests will be considered by the Chief Judge and his/her Assistant and their decision will be binding.

3. Bench participants must be bonafide employees of the mining industry or members of mine rescue teams designated to fulfill the requirements

4

of 30 CFR Part 49. This does not exclude bench participants whose team is not participating at the National Contest or a member of a college mine rescue team.

4. Disputes with regard to the Bench Contest (except discounts), shall be

immediately filed with the Director. Disputes filed shall be in writing and set forth incidents, times, names source of information and act complained against. Complainant shall remain accessible to the Director until the complaint is resolved. A decision by the Director shall be final.

5. Any similar terminology may be used to describe a part such as;

cylinder or bottle, etc.

Interpretations of Discount Sheet

A. Written Examination

1. For each incorrect statement 1

B. Time

The time will be recorded in minutes and seconds.

C. Competition at Bench

1. Failure to verbally identify each test being conducted 2

Verbally identify each test being performed.

2. Failure to verbally identify each problem 5

Failure to verbally identify is also interpreted as failure to find the problem.

3. Failure to correct each problem 5

The bench participant shall properly correct the problem and continue with the proper tests. Once a bench participant finds a predetermined problem and does not correct it before continuing with the remaining tests, he/she shall receive a five point discount for continuing without correcting the problem and a pending five point discount for failing to

5

correct the problem. If all of the remaining tests are properly conducted and passed and the participant returns to the uncorrected problem and corrects it, the pending five point discount will not be assessed. Should the participant continue on from this point and properly conduct all of the remaining tests again, he/she would also have the original five point discount for continuing tests removed.

4. Failure to conduct any visual examination or test on the BIOPAK 240-R, each test 5

5. Failure to tighten connections properly during assembly or testing, each connection 1

All connections must be tightened on the apparatus and verbally identified as hand tight or wrench tight at the time the connection is tightened. Failure to verbally identify at the time the connection is being tightened will result in a one point discount for each. Zero adjustment of the Mag. Gauge shall be made on the tester prior to connecting the breathing hoses to the tester.

This includes:

Vent Valve Assembly - hand tight Diaphragm Worm Gear Clamp – wrench tight

Flow Restrictor – wrench tight

Breathing Hose Worm Gear Clamps - wrench tight

Add and Constant Fittings – hand tight

Center Section Lid - hand tight

Center Section ¼ Turn Pins - hand tight

Cylinder connections - hand tight

Adapter to - Facemask hand tight

Test fixture connections - hand tight

6. Failure to comply with rules not covered in discount sheet, each infraction 2

If the discount is not listed on the discount sheet, and if it is not covered under one of the approved rules of the Contest, do not improvise a discount to cover the suspected violation.

6

D. Visuals

1. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the Upper and Lower Housing/harness 1

The visual examination will include an examination of the harness

assembly, lower housing, upper housing, outlet tube O-ring, external

gauge, O2 regulator and RMS. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 4 points)

2. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the center section assembly 1

The participant will verbally identify that the diaphragm is being examined for pliability and signs of deterioration. The participant will verbally identify that the O-ring and sealing edges are being examined for signs of damage and lubrication. The participant will verbally identify that the Demand Valve Assembly, PCM and Moisture Pads are being examined for damage. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 4 points)

3. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the carbon dioxide scrubber 1

A proper examination includes a visual inspection for defects and damage of carbon dioxide scrubbers, O-rings and Moisture Control Pad. The participant will verbally confirm the expiration date has not expired. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 3 points)

4. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the center section lid assembly 1

The visual examination will include an examination for defects and damage of the assembly, O-ring seal (lubrication), ice canisters, coolant lids and sealing edges. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 2 points)

5. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the O2 Cylinder 1

7

A proper cylinder examination includes a visual inspection of the cylinder. The participant will verbally identify the cylinder pressure on the gauge, the pressure rating on cylinder and the latest hydrostatic test date. Participant will inform the judge if the cylinder pressure is less than 1,500 PSI. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 3 points)

6. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the hoses 1

The participant will verbally identify that the hoses are being inspected for pliability and signs of deterioration. Stretching or manipulating the hoses with a massaging action will be part of this examination. The participant will verbally identify that the sealing edges, are being examined for signs of deterioration. (Install Arrows Up) The participant will verbally identify that the Adapter Assembly O-Ring is being inspected for damage and lubrication. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 2 points)

7. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the Facemask 1

The visual examination will include an examination of the head strap assembly, mask body, sealing edges, nose cup, the lens/anti-fog insert, speech diaphragms and magnetic wiper. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 4 points)

8. Failure to have Visual Apparatus fully assembled. (Ready for use) 2

E. Tester

1. Failure to conduct a proper constant flow test 2

Remove the constant add line and connect a test flow meter to the center section constant add feed line. Open O2 cylinder valve and

observe the test flow meter while holding the test flow meter in a level position. The flow reading on the flow meter should be between 1.6 and 2.4 LPM. Participant will verbally state flow reading. Close the O2 cylinder valve. Remove test flow meter. Reconnect constant add feed line to apparatus. The definition of “Completing the Flow Test” shall be determined when the contestant removes the upper housing cover,

8

attaches the flow meter to the constant flow port and turns the oxygen cylinder ON and VERBALLY states the reading on the flow meter.

2. Failure to conduct a proper Demand Valve Functional test 2

Remove the Facemask storage plug from the front of the Facemask adapter and install the leak test plug onto the Facemask adapter. Attach one end of the test kit rubber tubing to the leak test plug and the other end to the input port of the test kit. Verify that the SCBA has no pressure contained within the breathing chamber by a zero reading on the test kit pressure gauge. Open the oxygen cylinder valve and listen for the sound of gas flowing into the breathing chamber. The sound of oxygen flowing into the breathing chamber shall cease within approximately 1-3 seconds.

3. Failure to conduct a proper Emergency Bypass Functional test 2

Fill the SCBA with oxygen by depressing the emergency bypass one time for no more than 1-2 seconds. The sound of gas flowing into the center section shall be observed. The gas flow shall cease when the bypass valve button is released.

4. Failure to conduct a proper Vent Valve Functional test 2

Complete filling the SCBA with oxygen by depressing the emergency bypass one time for an additional 1 second, if needed. Observe the test kit pressure gauge; the reading will be at or below 2 inches of water column. Verbally state the final reading. Close O2 cylinder valve. Vent the pressure from the SCBA and remove rubber tubing and leak test plug.

5. Failure to conduct a proper low pressure leak test 2

Install the leak test plug onto the Facemask adapter and attach one end of the test kit rubber tubing to the leak test plug and the other end to the input port of the test kit. Verify that the SCBA has no pressure contained within the breathing chamber by a zero reading on the test kit pressure gauge. Insert two test keys into the keyholes in the back of the lower housing. Open the oxygen cylinder valve to pressurize the apparatus and tester. Gently depress the bypass valve to increase the reading to approximately 3 to 4 inches water column. Close the oxygen valve and fully depress the bypass valve. Immediately use the test kit bleed valve to adjust the SCBA pressure to 6-8 inches

9

water column pressure. Allow the SCBA’s pressure to stabilize at 6-8 inches water column of pressure. After one minute, the pressure gauge of the test kit shall indicate no less than 0.2-inches water column pressure below the stabilized starting pressure. An increase in pressure of 0.2 inches Water Column or greater on the test kit requires a restart of the one-minute timed test. Vent the pressure from the SCBA and remove rubber tubing, leak test plug, and keys. Replace Facemask adapter plug.

6. Failure to conduct a proper RMS Gauge and TRIM test 2

While looking at the gauge and TRIM, open the oxygen cylinder valve and listen for the alarm test and observe the gauge and TRIM color sequence. The gauge will reach full pressure (approximately 60 seconds). The alarm and TRIM will go through a startup self-check: Alarm, Red, Green, Blue light sequence, then a flashing green light. Check for stabilization of alarm lights. Verify that the oxygen cylinder pressure gauge and the RMS gauge are within +/- 10%. Verbally state the final reading.

7. Failure to conduct a proper High Pressure Leak test 2

Open the oxygen cylinder with the storage plug installed; inspect each plumbing connection and Flow Restrictor with Lec-Tec for a minimum of 60 seconds. During the test the contestant must depress the emergency by-pass to properly check the output fitting of the emergency by-pass. Contestant can depress the by-pass to check for leaks on the output side of the by-pass at any time during the 60 second test. The 60 second test begins when Lec-Tec has been applied to the last fitting, during the test additional fluid may be applied as the contestant checks for leaks.

8. Failure to conduct a proper Low Pressure Alarm Functional test 2

Turn off the oxygen cylinder and allow the BioPak to slowly reduce system pressure. The low alarm must activate between 650-1000 psig and is indicated by a flashing red light and audible alarm. (Verbally state reading) The RMS will automatically power down once the system pressure is dropped below 25 psig. Vent the SCBA of pressure and remove test equipment.

9. Failure to have Test Apparatus fully assembled. (Ready for use) Note: Breathing hoses do not need to be in straps on test apparatus 2

10

STATEMENTS OF FACT BENCH BIOPAK 240-R CONTEST

1. Use only exact replacement parts in the configuration as specified by the

manufacturer. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or

Critical User’s Instructions)

2. The battery is to be changed in fresh air only. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

3. MSHA approved for use with one of the following 9-Volt batteries only: Eveready Panasonic Rayovac Duracell (Remote Monitoring System MSHA Electronic Approval Page)

4. Never substitute, modify, add or omit parts. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

5. Prior to using the BioPak 240 Revolution it must be determined that the user is medically fit. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

6. Always handle oxygen cylinders with care to prevent damage. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

7. Do not open the cylinder valve in the presence of open flame, sparks or high radiant heat. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

8. Oxygen will enhance the combustion of other materials so that materials that normally will not burn in air may burn in oxygen-rich atmospheres; and, materials that do burn in air will burn more vigorously and at a higher temperature in oxygen-rich atmospheres. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

9. Oxygen will not cause materials to ignite without the presence of an ignition source. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

11

10. The use of an SCBA will add to the workload and stress of the user. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

11. The BioPak 240 Revolution is suitable for respiratory protection entry into and escape from oxygen deficient atmospheres with a temperature as low as -5 degrees F (-5F) (-20C). (Users/Benchman Cautions and Limitations or Critical User’s Instructions)

12. The BioPak 240 Revolution is approved when the oxygen cylinder is fully charged with compressed medical or aviation grade oxygen at 3000 psi. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

13. Allow the oxygen cylinder to cool after filling to determine the correct pressure. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

14. A foreign gas may cause cylinder corrosion. User/Benchman: Cautions

and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

15. Always check for a current hydrostatic test date. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

16. DOT requires carbon fiber wrapped aluminum cylinders be tested by an

approved facility on a 5-year cycle from the date of manufacture. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

17. An unapproved facepiece will compromise the protection provided to the user by the SCBA. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

18. A good facepiece seal is important to achieving full protection and proper

SCBA duration. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or

Critical User’s Instructions)

19. Users should conform to MSHA/NIOSH guidelines concerning facial hair and

the use of facemasks. (Users/Benchman Cautions and Limitations or Critical

User’s Instructions)

12

20. Replace the battery when the low battery alarm has activated, after 200 hours of use or every 6 months whichever comes first. (Benchman section 3.4)

21. The connectors of the monitoring device may only be connected to a Bio marine BioPak 240R breathing Apparatus oxygen regulator, manifold block and breathing chamber. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

22. The fiber optic cable may only be connected to the BioPak 240R remote gauge assembly. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

23. Turn-Around maintenance procedures should be performed as soon as possible after each use. (Benchman Section 3.1)

24. It is acceptable to leave the oxygen cylinder in place until after washing and disinfecting has been completed. (Benchman Section 1.2)

25. Immediately after completion of BioPak use, remove the used CO2

scrubber canisters. (Benchman: Section 1.2

26. DO NOT submerge the Alarm Module during turn-around maintenance. (Benchman: Section 1.3)

27. Do not allow any fluids to contact the input port of the pressure regulator. (Benchman: Section 1.3)

28. Use only cleaners and disinfectants that are approved by Bio marine. (Benchman: Section 1.3)

29. If Cleaning is not immediately possible after each use, at a minimum remove and discard the CO2 scrubber and moisture pad. (Benchman: Section 1.3)

30. Remove the oxygen cylinder making sure the outlet tube O-ring remains in

place and install the regulator cover. (Benchman: Section 1.2)

31. Allow all components to remain wetted by the cleaning solution a minimum of

10 minutes. (Benchman: Section 1.3)

32. Thoroughly rinse all components in clean water to remove all disinfectant

solution. (Benchman: Section 1.3)

13

33. C.O.P.D. could limit or prevent the use of the BioPak 240 Revolution. User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

34. Place freeze forms onto a level surface in a freezer for a minimum of 8 hour

period at a temperature of 10 degrees F or less. (Benchman: Section 1.4)

35. If the optional magnetic wiper is utilized soak both chamois surfaces of the wiper pieces with water. (User: Section 3.2)

36. The manual(s) are the minimum recommended procedures for maintaining the BioPak 240R. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

37. Failure to follow the minimum procedures presented in the manual(s) may violate government or agency approvals as well as void the manufacturer’s warranty. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

38. To prevent mold growth remove the moisture control foam pads after each use (Benchman: Section 1.3)

39. Do not pre-pack any BioPak that will be stored at temperatures at or below 32

degrees F. (Benchman: Section 1.12)

40. Pre-packing the BioPak 240 R with carbon dioxide scrubbers is only permitted

when utilizing Orbsorb carbon dioxide scrubber. (Benchman: Section 1.12)

41. Pre-packed carbon dioxide scrubbers may only be stored in the apparatus for a maximum period of 1-year. (Benchman: Section 1.12)

42. Moisture control sponges must be installed dry when pre-packing the BioPak. (Benchman: Section 1.12)

43. Apparatus that are pre-packed with the carbon dioxide scrubber shall be stored within the specific storage temperature and humidity levels and must be sealed air-tight in the apparatus. (Benchman: Section 1.12)

44. Failure to install the moisture pad will result in scrubber flooding and cause

elevated carbon dioxide levels in the inhalation gas. (Benchman: Section 1.12)

45. Users are not permitted to mix versions of the Orbsorb within a BioPak. (Benchman: Section 1.12)

14

46. Install two carbon dioxide scrubber canisters into the breathing chamber making sure that they are properly aligned and fully seated. (Benchman: Section 1.12)

47. The alarm system battery shall be replaced after 200-hours of use, every 6- months or after the alarm system low battery alarm flashes with corresponding horn sounding. (Benchman: Section 3.4)

48. The oxygen cylinder must be fully charged to above 1500 psi to perform a

high pressure leak test. (Benchman: Section 2.6)

49. Use caution when installing the flow restrictor to insure that the O-ring does not roll out of its gland. (Benchman: Section 3.5)

50. The Cylinder should be inspected regularly for signs of damage to the outer

wrapping. (Benchman: Section 3.3)

51. The Turn-Around Maintenance Tag should be attached to the apparatus in

a prominent location to show completion of all maintenance steps. (Benchman: Section 1.1)

52. In addition to normal Turn-Around Maintenance, the SCBA shall be visually inspected and pressure tested on a monthly basis if the apparatus is being used at least once a month or is placed in long term storage. (Benchman Section: 2)

53. BioPaks that have been placed in long term storage should have the Long

Term Maintenance Procedure conducted every-6 months. (Benchman: Section 2)

54. The LED indication will cease when the pressure gauge reads less than 25 psi. (Benchman: Section 1.10)

55. Never pry an O-ring from its glands with a screwdriver. Remove O-rings by hand or with the pick tool provided in the service kit. (Benchman: Section 3.2)

56. Cristo-Lube and Dow-111 are the only lubricants approved for use in the apparatus. (Benchman: Section 3.2)

57. Never lubricate the outlet tube O-ring that sits between the oxygen cylinder and the pressure regulator. (Benchman: Section 3.2)

15

58. Cylinders that have been hydro-static tested shall be cleaned for high-pressure oxygen service per national standards. (Benchman: Section 3.2)

59. Cylinders are to be retired from service 15-years after the date of

manufacture. (Benchman: Section 3.2)

60. The Alarm module will require replacement if any damage to the housing is discovered. (Benchman: Section 3.)

61. If the flow does not meet the requirements of the table in the Bench Manual

the flow restrictor will need replacement. (Benchman: Section 1.8)

62. A good facemask seal is important to achieving full protection and duration. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

63. Personnel who intend to use protective breathing equipment in a dangerous atmosphere must have the proper training, temperament and experience. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

64. A clean shaven user will significantly increase the chances of achieving an

adequate face seal. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

65. The ongoing effectiveness and reliability of any protective breathing equipment is dependent upon the user’s standard of care in maintaining the equipment. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

66. The BioPak has been tested for intrinsic safety in methane-air mixtures

only. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

67. The battery is to be changed in fresh air only. Do not change in hazardous areas. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical

User’s Instructions)

68. The BioPak is a Self-Contained Closed Circuit Pressure Demand type certified as Entry and Escape with a 4-hour duration. (Benchman: Section 6)

69. The constant Add is 1.8 liters average. (Benchman: Section 6)

16

70. The Demand Add flow is a minimum 80 liters per minute. (Benchman: Section 6)

71. The oxygen cylinder has a volume of 440 liters at 3000 psi. (Benchman:

Section 6)

72. The BioPak breathing chamber has a Tidal Volume greater than 6 liters. (Benchman: Section 6)

73. For extreme temperature ranges, the BioPak should be configured with ice coolers. When ambient temperatures are greater than 140 degrees F the recommended duration is no more than 15 minutes and is limited by human endurance. (Benchman: Section 6)

74. The emergency Add has a minimum flow rate of 80 liters per minute.

(Benchman: Section 6)

75. The BioPak operational conditions as it relates to relative humidity is 0 to 100%. (Benchman: Section 6)

76. BioPak weight fully charged is 34 pounds. (Benchman: Section 6)

77. Do not re-use CO2 scrubber chemical. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions

78. The flow test results at 0-5280 feet at a cylinder pressure of 1500-2000 shall be 1.8- 2.4 liters per minute. (Benchman: Section 1.8)

79. During an alarm test the LED indication should turn to a flashing red with a

horn sounding when the pressure gauge reads between 650-1000 psi. (Benchman: Section 1.10)

80. Do not allow oil, grease or other foreign materials to come in contact

with cylinder, cylinder valve or cylinder pressure regulator to prevent possible ignition. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

81. The end of service life or low Oxygen alarm is a flashing red light and horn

sounding. (User: Section 2.7)

82. The flashing blue light indicates an Ice Reminder. (User: Section 2.7)

17

83. The pressure gauge is protected against sudden loss of oxygen in the event of a gauge line severing by a manual disconnect located at the gauge pass through point of the housing. (User: Section 2.7)

84. A Pacemaker or other Cardiac Condition could limit or prevent the use of the

BioPak 240 Revolution. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

85. Breathing difficulties could limit or prevent the use of the BioPak 240

Revolution. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

86. Claustrophobia or anxiety when wearing a SCBA could limit or prevent the

use of the BioPak 240 Revolution. (User/Benchman: Cautions and

Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

87. The instructions provided by the USER and BENCHMAN manuals cannot replace accredited training provided by qualified instructors in the proper and safe use of Bio marine breathing apparatus. (User: Section 1.3)

88. X-Ray evidence of Pneumonia could limit or prevent the use of the BioPak 240

Revolution. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instruction)

89. Epilepsy-Grand Mal or Petit Mal could limit or prevent the use of the BioPak

240 Revolution. (User/Benchman: Cautions and Limitations, Special or Critical User’s Instructions)

90. Use the ¼ inch hex driver from the service Kit to remove the flow restrictor.

(Benchman Section 3.5)

NOTE: The References listed above for the Statements of Facts can be down loaded for

free from Bio-marine’s web site.

18

BioPak 240 Revolution Complete

1 2

Cons. No. Designation

1 2

Cons. No. Designation

2 Upper Housing Assembly

3 Coolant Lid

4 Ice Canister

5 Breathing Hose

12 O2 Cylinder

13 Lower Housing Assembly

14 Harness Assembly

15 Ice Canister Freeze Form

19 Facemask Storage Plug

21 PCM Heat Exchanger

22 Moisture Absorbent Pad Set

19

Lower Housing Assembly

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Lower Housing Shell 2 Diaphragm Springs 3 External Oxygen Knob 7 Vent Spacer

12 Latch Foam Pad 16 Oxygen Cylinder Hold-Down Strap 18 Carrying Handle

20

Pneumatic Assembly

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Bypass Feed Tube 2 Bypass Return Tube 3 Oxygen Feed Tube 6 Bypass Valve Push Button 7 Bypass Valve

9 Oxygen Regulator Assembly 10 Remote Gauge Shut Off Assembly 11 Remote Gauge Assembly 12 Remote Gauge Feed Tube Assembly

21

Manifold Assembly

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Manifold Block w/ Pressure Switch 2 Constant Add Flow Restrictor Assembly

3 Swivel Elbow Fitting

22

Center Section Assembly

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Lid O-Ring 2 Demand Feed Tube 4 Center Section Body Assembly 6 Constant Add Fitting 9 Demand Add Fitting

11 Demand Valve Gasket 12 Demand Valve Assembly 14 Flexible Diaphragm 15 Diaphragm Clamp

23

Center Section Lid Assembly

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Coolant Lid 2 Center Section Lid

3 Flow Baffle 4 Self-Tapping Screws

24

Diaphragm Assembly

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Flexible Diaphragm 2 Vent Cap 3 Vent Body O-Ring 4 Vent Body

5 Vent Seat O-Ring 6 Vent Valve Spring 7 Vent Valve Seat

25

Breathing Hose

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Breathing Hose 2 Worm Gear Hose Clamp

3 Stepless Ear Clamp

26

Ice Canister Freeze Form

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Base Assembly 2 Freeze Tube

3 Top Plate 4 Wing Nut

27

Oxygen Cylinder Assembly

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Green Cylinder 2 Exterior O-Ring 3 Valve Collar

4 Interior O-Ring 5 Valve Assembly

28

RMS Monitoring System

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Battery Door 2 Battery Door Gasket

3 Battery Door Warning Label 5 9Vdc Battery

29

5 13

4

10

1

7

2

3 12 9

6

8

ss

30

AV3500 Facemask-Complete

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Interface Tube

2 Interface Gasket

3 Interface Fitting

4 Clip

5 Button

6 Cowling

7 Locking Pan Head Screw

8 Hose Adapter O-Ring

9 AV3500 Hose Adapter

10 Facemask Magnetic Wiper

12 Chin Condensation Pad

13 Lens

31

Tool Kit

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Case Assembly 26 Leak Check Adapter Fitting 3 Flow Test Fixture 4 Test Key 6 Vent Valve Wrench

7 Center Section Pneumatic Plug 9 Combination Pick Tool 13 1/4 - Inch Hex Driver 20 Leak Detection Fluid 22 3/8 – Inch OD Rubber Tubing

SECTION IV

2018

Bench BG-4

RULES

2018 BENCH BG-4 CONTEST

RULES

INDEX

Section IV

Title Page

Rules Governing 2018 Bench BG-4 Contest and Interpretations of Discount Cards .............................................................................. 1

Statements of Fact (Bench Contest) ............................................................................ 15

Identification of Parts .................................................................................................. 21

1

RULES GOVERNING 2018 BENCH BG-4 CONTEST AND INTERPRETATIONS OF DISCOUNT CARDS

1. Each participant must be under guard before the start of the Contest in a

location assigned by the Chief Judge and must remain continuously under guard until time to work the problem. Information for bench problem design is available on the MSHA website WWW.MSHA.Gov in the Mine Rescue section under BG4 Designers Resources. Participants under guard must be in a location where they will be unable to obtain any information concerning the problem to be worked. Any participant receiving information concerning a Contest problem prior to starting to work the problem will be disqualified by the Chief Judge and the Assistant Chief Judge. No person, except guards and Contest officials assigned to give the written examination, will be allowed to communicate with any participant under guard. Those who have performed will not be permitted to communicate with any participant awaiting their turn to perform.

2. Any indication of receiving unauthorized information during the working of the problem may result in disqualification as determined by the Chief Judge and the Assistant Chief Judge. No one except judges, Contest officials, and working participants will be permitted in the work area, unless special approval is given by the Chief Judge. Communication with bench participants, except for the judges, is prohibited. News media and photographers who wish to be in the working area must receive permission from the Director and be accompanied by a Contest official.

3. Any bench participant not in place and ready at the time specified will be disqualified from the Contest.

4. The bench participant will be provided with two BG-4 apparatus (one disassembled, one assembled), an RZ-25 tester, RZ-7000 tester, or Test-It 6100, a stopwatch, defogging solution, leak detector fluid, test kit and a tool kit. Only the tools and fluid provided will be used for testing and assembly of the apparatus. The work at the bench will consist of (1) a visual examination of a disassembled BG-4 and the proper assembly and preparation for use in rescue work. This will include correcting any predetermined problem(s) so that the apparatus is in proper working order. Simulating defogging of the facepiece lens will be done as part of the visual examination. This visual examination, correcting predetermined problem(s), and proper assembly can be done at any time allowed for working of the problem. (2) Test the assembled BG-4 apparatus with a tester, and correct the predetermined problem(s) so that the apparatus is in proper working condition. Except for removing the sealing cap

2

from the coupling and removing the Cover shell, the assembled BG-4 apparatus cannot be disassembled to look for problems, until the hoses are attached to the tester and the apparatus fails a test. When testing is completed on the assembled BG-4 apparatus, the hoses shall be removed from the tester, connected to the facepiece, and the back cover installed. This shall be done before the clock is stopped.

5. Spare parts to correct the predetermined problem(s) will be provided once

the bench participant has specifically identified the problem. This will require the participant to point out the exact location of the deficiency. (Example: Positive pressure leak in the breathing bag. Participant will identify the location of the hole.)

6. When an unplanned deficiency is encountered with the apparatus, the participant will be notified by the judges that the deficiency is not part of the problem. The judge will stop the clock, and any time used to correct the deficiency will not be charged to the working time. However, the process of verbal elimination shall not be used by the bench participant to find the predetermined problem(s). If it becomes obvious to the judges that this is occurring, the first offense will result in a warning, the second offense a discount, and the third offense could result in disqualification as determined by the Chief Judge. (Example: Participant verbally identifies a deficiency with every part of the facepiece when only one predetermined problem exists.)

7. The bench participant will not be allowed to bring any materials, written information, or records to the work site. Tests will be performed in sequence on the assembled BG-4 apparatus using the standard test procedures with a tester as outlined in the Draeger Instruction for Use manual for PSS BG-4 AP/CP (Second Edition July 2004 or First Edition June 2007).

8. A maximum of 30 minutes will be allowed to complete the problem. The bench judge will inform the participant when he/she has Five minutes remaining to work the problem. At the completion of the problem, the judge(s) and the participant will note the working time of the problem with the official timekeeper. Work done after the clock is stopped will not be recognized.

9. Manually abusing or intentionally over or under pressurizing the tester

substantially will be considered abusing the equipment. If the participant is observed abusing the tester, the first offense will result in a warning, the second offense will result in a discount, and the third offense could result in disqualification as determined by the Chief Judge.

3

A. Written Examination of Bench Participant

1. The written examination shall consist of 30 questions. Twenty questions for the written examination will be taken verbatim from the Statements of Fact which will be multiple choice with three choices and each blank shall represent a key word with no more than two consecutive blanks per statement. Ten questions will be taken verbatim from identification of parts. Intentional misspelling of words by the test developer will not be allowed. Multiple choice answers with numbers will either be in the form of numbers written out or numerical. Either version is acceptable. “None of the above” is not acceptable as one of the answers. Thirty minutes will be allowed for the written examination.

2. In special circumstances, individual bench participants may be given oral instead of written examinations by at least two judges. Requests for consideration shall be presented to the Director of the Contest at the time of registration.

3. Bench participants will be separated to the extent possible, and every effort will be made to prohibit discussion of questions and answers among the bench participants.

B. Miscellaneous

1. In the event of ties in the Bench Contest, the number of discounts at bench will be the first tie breaker; the number of discounts on written examination will be the second tie breaker; and the official working time at bench in minutes and seconds will be the third tie breaker.

2. The bench participant and trainer will report to a designated location to review and prepare protests within one hour of notification. Twenty minutes will be given to review and prepare written protests. All protests will be considered by the Chief Judge and his/her Assistant and their decision will be binding.

3. Disputes with regard to the Bench Contest (except discounts), shall be immediately filed with the Director. Disputes filed shall be in writing and set forth incidents, times, names, source of information and act complained against. Complainant shall remain accessible to the Director until the complaint is resolved. A decision by the Director shall be final.

4

4. Any similar terminology used to describe a part is acceptable such as; cylinder or bottle, etc.

5. Bench participants must be bonafide employees of the mining industry

or members of mine rescue teams designated to fulfill the requirements

of 30 CFR Part 49. This does not exclude bench participants whose team is not participating at the National Contest or a member of a college mine rescue team.

6. All parts must correspond with the individual units that are being

used for contest purposes only. (Drain valve, cooler, mask, anti-vibe,

CO2 absorber, hoses, coupler, etc.)

Interpretations of Discount Sheet

A. Written Examination

1. For each incorrect statement 1

B. Time

The time will be recorded in minutes and seconds.

C. Competition at Bench

1. Failure to verbally identify each test being conducted 2

Verbally identify each test being performed.

2. Failure to verbally identify each problem 5

Failure to verbally identify is also interpreted as failure to find the problem.

3. Failure to correct each problem 5

The bench participant shall properly correct the problem and continue with the proper tests. Once a bench participant finds a predetermined

5

problem and does not correct it before continuing with the remaining tests, he/she shall receive a five point discount for continuing without correcting the problem and a pending five point discount for failing to correct the problem. If all of the remaining tests are properly conducted and passed and the participant returns to the uncorrected problem and corrects it, the pending five point discount will not be assessed. Should the participant continue on from this point and properly conduct all of the remaining tests again, he/she would also have the original five point discount for continuing tests removed.

4. Failure to conduct any visual examination or test on the BG-4, each test 5

5. Failure to tighten connections properly during assembly or testing, each connection 1

All connections must be tightened on the apparatus and verbally identified as hand tight at the time the connection is made. Failure to verbally identify at the time the connection is being made will result in a one point discount for each. Zero adjustments shall be made on the tester prior to connecting the breathing hoses to the tester.

This includes:

Cap on drain valve - hand tight

Drain valve to breathing bag - hand tight Minimum valve to breathing bag - hand tight Minimum valve to O2 supply hose- hand tight

Cylinder connection - hand tight

Factory/Refillable Cartridge connections - hand tight

Relief valve connection - hand tight

Cooler to bag connection - hand tight Distribution hose connection - hand tight

Breathing hoses during the visual examination on the disassembled apparatus) – Hand

Hose adapter on the tester - hand tight Cross over Hose Switchbox to Relief valve – hand tight

Once the zero adjustment on the tester has been made, do not readjust setting for balance of tests.

6. Failure to comply with rules not covered in discount sheet, each

infraction 2

6

If the discount is not listed on the discount sheet, and if it is not covered under one of the approved rules of the Contest, do not improvise a discount to cover the suspected violation.

D. Visuals

1. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the frame/harness 1

The visual examination will include an examination of the harness assembly, frame, back cover, visible sealing rings, Sentinel, O2

regulator, Anti-vibe and switch box. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 4 points)

2. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the breathing bag 1

The participant will verbally identify that the breathing bag is being examined for pliability and signs of deterioration. Stretching or manipulating the breathing bag with a massaging action will be part of this examination. The participant will verbally identify that the sealing surfaces are being examined for signs of deterioration or damage. Also, the minimum valve, drain valve, lever, and springs will be examined for damage. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 4 points)

3. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the O2

Cylinder 1

A proper cylinder examination includes a visual inspection of the cylinder. The participant will verbally identify the cylinder pressure on the gauge, the pressure rating on cylinder, the latest hydrostatic test date, and identify if the cylinder is plus rated, if steel. Participant will inform the judge if the cylinder pressure is less than 2,600 PSI for the Sentinel. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 4 points)

4. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the

Factory/refillable Cartridge 1

7

A proper examination includes a visual inspection for defects. If a Factory packed cartridge is used, verbally identify that the sealing surfaces are not damaged, and identify the expiration date with month and year. If a refillable cartridge is used, a visual inspection for defects, strap with tension spring hook, seal, Refillable scrubber screens and filter mats are required. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 3 points)

5. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the relief valve 1

A proper examination includes a visual inspection for defects. Verbally identify that the valve and O-ring are not damaged.

6. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the cooler 1

A proper examination includes a visual inspection for defects. Verbally identify that the sealing surfaces are not damaged.

7. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the hoses 1

The participant will verbally identify that the hoses are being inspected for pliability and signs of deterioration. Stretching or manipulating the hoses with a massaging action will be part of this examination. The participant will verbally identify that the sealing edges/surfaces, including bayonet rings and Anti-crush rings are being examined for signs of deterioration. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 2 points)

8. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the coupling, inhalation and exhalation valves 1

A proper examination includes a visual inspection for defects, sealing surfaces and valve discs. Verbally identify that the sealing edges/surfaces and valve discs are not damaged.

9. Failure to conduct a proper visual examination of the facepiece 1

The visual examination will include an examination of the head strap assembly, mask body (including sealing surfaces), the visor, speaking diaphragm, and wiper. Defogging the visor shall be simulated as part of the visual facepiece examination. Failure to examine and verbally identify the examination will result in one discount for each. (Maximum 4 points)

8

10. Failure to have Visual Apparatus fully assembled. (Ready for use) 2

E. RZ-25 Tester

1. Failure to conduct a proper low pressure warning test 2

Connect breathing hoses to test unit. Set RZ-25 tester on positive pressure pumping, gently activate bellows, and watch the pressure gauge. If the low pressure warning is operating properly, warning should be activated when the pressure is less than 1.4 mbar for the Sentinel.

2. Failure to conduct a proper inhalation valve test 2

The RZ-25 tester is set on positive pressure pumping. Tightly pinch the exhalation hose with your hand. Gently activate bellows until 10 mbar is indicated on the pressure gauge.

3. Failure to conduct a proper exhalation valve test 2

Set the RZ-25 tester on negative pressure pumping. Tightly pinch the inhalation hose with your hand. Gently activate bellows until -10 mbar is indicated on the pressure gauge.

4. Failure to conduct a proper drain valve test 2

Set RZ-25 tester on positive pressure pumping. Pump bellows until 10 mbar is indicated on the pressure gauge. While pumping, fit the open side of the sealing cap over the tappet of the relief valve and hold it tightly until it is pressed into place by the inflated breathing bag. The drain valve must not open at 10 mbar.

5. Failure to conduct a proper leak test with positive pressure 2

Set RZ-tester on leak test. Bleed needle to 7 mbar and start stopwatch. Needle should not change more than 10 mm H20 or 1 mbar in 60

seconds. Set RZ-tester on negative pressure pumping, the breathing bag is vented. Remove the sealing cap.

6. Failure to conduct a proper relief valve test 2

9

Set RZ-tester on positive pressure pumping. Pump the bellows until the relief valve opens, it should open between 2 and 5 mbar. Participant will verbally state reading of valve opening.

NOTE: An alternate relief valve test may be conducted by observing the reading on the RZ tester (with the tester set on leak test). Flow of oxygen from the constant dosage will cause relief valve to open between 2 and 5 mbar. If this alternate test is used, it must be conducted after the completion of the bypass valve test.

7. Failure to conduct a proper high pressure leak test 2

Set RZ-25 tester on leak test. Open cylinder valve. Watch the Sentinel unit, the cylinder pressure is indicated here. If it is lower than 2600 psi, change the oxygen cylinder. If it is greater than 2600 psi, alarm beeps two times. Sentinel indicates “close cylinder” icon, as soon as the icon appears, close cylinder valve.

Result of the tests is output after approximately 15 seconds. If the PSS BG-4 is okay, “open cylinder valve” icon, as soon as the icon appears open cylinder valve.

8. Failure to conduct a proper constant metering valve test 2

Set RZ-25 tester on positive pressure pumping. Pump bellows until the breathing bag is inflated. While pumping, fit the open side of the sealing cap over the tappet of the relief valve and hold it tightly until it is pressed into position by the inflated bag. Set the RZ-tester on Red Dosage 0.5 - 2 L/min. The constant metering quantity should lie between 1.5 and 1.9 L/min. Participant will verbally state dosage

value on the red scale as soon as the pointer has stopped moving.

9. Failure to conduct a proper minimum valve test 2

Set RZ-25 tester on negative pressure pumping. The breathing bag is vented automatically, remove sealing cap, pump bellows until minimum valve is heard to open in breathing bag and there is a hissing sound.

Watch the pressure gauge, the minimum valve should open at a value between 0.1 and 2.5 mbar. Participant will verbally identify reading of opening of valve.

10. Failure to conduct a proper bypass valve test 2

10

Set RZ-tester on leak test. Press red button for bypass valve. Oxygen must be heard to flow into the circuit, the breathing bag inflates.

11. Failure to conduct a proper low/residual pressure warning test 2

Close cylinder valve. Watch the display or sentinel unit. The warning should be generated at approx. 700 psi. Alarm sounds intermittently, red indicator flashes. Unplug coupling from RZ-tester. Participant will verbally state reading.

12. Failure to conduct a proper battery test 2

On activation and deactivation, the Sentinel automatically checks and displays the battery capacity. To switch off the Sentinel, simultaneously press the right and left hand button until the single sharp audible bleep sounds. Release the buttons. For three seconds, Sentinel shows the battery status. Sentinel switches off.

13. Failure to have Test Apparatus fully assembled. (Ready for use) 2

F. RZ-7000 Tester

1. Failure to conduct a proper low pressure warning test 2

Connect breathing hoses to test unit. Set RZ-7000 tester on positive pressure pumping, gently pump, and watch the pressure gauge. If the low pressure warning is operating properly, warning should be activated when the pressure is less than 1.4 mbar for the Sentinel.

2. Failure to conduct a proper inhalation valve test 2

The RZ-7000 tester is set on positive pressure pumping. Tightly pinch the exhalation hose with your hand. Pump until 10 mbar is indicated on the pressure gauge.

3. Failure to conduct a proper exhalation valve test 2

Set the RZ-7000 tester on negative pressure pumping. Tightly pinch the inhalation hose with your hand. Pump until -10 mbar is indicated on the pressure gauge.

11

4. Failure to conduct a proper drain valve test 2

Set RZ-7000 tester on positive pressure pumping. Pump until 15 mbar is indicated on the pressure gauge. While pumping, fit the open side of the sealing cap over the tappet of the relief valve and hold it tightly until it is pressed into place by the inflated breathing bag. The drain valve should not open before 15mbar.

5. Failure to conduct a proper leak test with positive pressure 2

Set RZ-7000 tester on leak test. Bleed needle to 7.5 mbar and start

stopwatch. Needle should not change more than 10 mm H20 or 1 mbar

in 60 seconds. Set RZ-7000 tester on negative pressure pumping, the breathing bag is vented. Remove the sealing cap.

6. Failure to conduct a proper relief valve test 2

Set RZ-7000 tester on positive pressure pumping. Pump until the relief valve opens, it should open between 2 and 5 mbar. Participant will verbally state reading of valve opening.

NOTE: An alternate relief valve test may be conducted by observing the reading on the RZ-7000 tester (with the tester set on leak test). Flow of oxygen from the constant dosage will cause relief valve to open between 2 and 5 mbar. If this alternate test is used, it must be conducted after the completion of the bypass valve test.

7. Failure to conduct a proper high pressure leak test 2

Set RZ-7000 tester on leak test. Open cylinder valve. Watch the Sentinel unit, the cylinder pressure is indicated here. If it is lower than 2600 psi, change the oxygen cylinder. If it is greater than 2600 psi, alarm beeps two times. Sentinel indicates “close cylinder” icon, as soon as the icon appears, close cylinder valve.

Result of the tests is output after approximately 15 seconds. If the PSS BG-4 is okay, “open cylinder valve” icon, as soon as the icon appears open cylinder valve.

8. Failure to conduct a proper constant metering valve test 2

Set RZ-7000 tester on positive pressure pumping. Pump until the

breathing bag is inflated. While pumping, fit the open side of the sealing

12

cap over the tappet of the relief valve and hold it tightly until it is pressed into position by the inflated bag. Set the RZ-7000 tester on Red Dosage 0.5 - 2 L/min. The constant metering quantity should lie between 1.5 and 1.9 L/min. Participant will verbally state dosage value on the red scale as soon as the pointer has stopped moving.

9. Failure to conduct a proper minimum valve test 2

Set RZ-7000 tester on negative pressure pumping. The breathing bag is vented automatically, remove sealing cap, pump until minimum valve is heard to open in breathing bag and there is a hissing sound. Watch the pressure gauge, the minimum valve should open at a value between 0.1 and 2.5 mbar. Participant will verbally identify reading of opening of valve.

10. Failure to conduct a proper bypass valve test 2

Set RZ-7000 tester on leak test. Press red button for bypass valve. Oxygen must be heard to flow into the circuit, the breathing bag inflates.

11. Failure to conduct a proper low/residual pressure warning test 2

Close cylinder valve. Watch the display or sentinel unit. The warning should be generated at approx. 700 psi. Alarm sounds intermittently, red indicator flashes. Unplug coupling from RZ-7000 tester. Participant will verbally state reading.

12. Failure to conduct a proper battery test 2

On activation and deactivation, the Sentinel automatically checks and displays the battery capacity. To switch off the Sentinel, simultaneously press the right and left hand button until the single sharp audible bleep sounds. Release the buttons. For three seconds, Sentinel shows the battery status. Sentinel switches off.

13. Failure to have Test Apparatus fully assembled. (Ready for use) 2

G. Test-It 6100 1. Failure to conduct a proper low pressure warning test 2

13

Connect breathing hoses to the tester. Set Test-It 6100 so that it indicates the pressure in mbar. Open shut-off valve at the test unit. Connect positive pressure side of the pump to the test unit. Pump slowly. Watch the test unit; the low pressure warning should be activated when the pressure is lower than 1.4 mbar for the Sentinel. De-aerate PSS BG 4 via test unit until the low pressure warning is switched off.

2. Failure to conduct a proper inhalation valve test 2

The tester is set on pressure in mbar. Connect positive pressure side of the pump to the test unit. Tightly pinch the exhalation hose with your hand. Pump slowly until at least 10 mbar is indicated on the test unit.

3. Failure to conduct a proper exhalation valve test 2

The tester is set on pressure in mbar. Connect negative pressure side of the pump to the test unit. Tightly pinch the inhalation hose with your hand. Gently activate pump until at least -10 mbar is indicated on the test unit.

4. Failure to conduct a proper drain valve test 2

Connect positive pressure side of the pump to the test unit. Pump until at least 10 mbar is indicated on the pressure gauge. While pumping, fit the open side of the sealing cap over the tappet of the relief valve and hold it tightly until it is pressed into place by the inflated breathing bag. The drain valve should not open before 15 mbar.

5. Failure to conduct a proper leak test with positive pressure 2

Close shut-off valve at the test unit. Reduce the pressure to 7 mbar at the test unit. Start the stopwatch. Reading should not change by more than 1 mbar in 60 seconds. Open the shut-off valve and De-aerate PSS BG 4. Remove the sealing cap.

6. Failure to conduct a proper relief valve test 2

Open shut-off valve at the test unit. Connect positive pressure side of

14

the pump to the test unit. Pump slowly until the relief valve opens; it should open between 2 and 5 mbar. Participant will verbally state reading of valve opening.

7. Failure to conduct a proper high pressure leak test 2

Set tester on leak test. Open cylinder valve. Watch the display unit, the cylinder pressure is indicated here. If it is lower than 2600 psi, change the oxygen cylinder. If it is greater than 2600 psi, alarm sounds once. Sentinel indicates “close cylinder” icon, as soon as the icon appears, close cylinder valve.

Result of the tests is output after approximately 15 seconds. If the PSS BG-4 is okay, “open cylinder valve” icon, as soon as the icon appears open the cylinder valve.

8. Failure to conduct a proper constant metering valve test 2

Open the flow valve, switch Test-It 6100 to LPM, install dosage adapter and gently activate bypass valve to seat sealing cap over relief valve to reach 1.5 LPM. The constant metering quantity should lie between 1.5 and 1.9 L/min. Participant will verbally state dosage value on the red scale, as soon as the pointer has stopped moving.

9. Failure to conduct a proper minimum valve test 2

Set the tester to indicate pressure and negative pressure pumping. The breathing bag is vented automatically, remove sealing cap, pump with negative pressure until minimum valve is heard to open in breathing bag and there is a hissing sound. Watch the display, the minimum valve should open at a value between 0.1 and 2.5 mbar. Participant

will verbally identify reading of opening of valve.

10. Failure to conduct a proper bypass valve test 2

Close the shut-off valve at the test unit. Press red button for bypass valve. Oxygen must be heard to flow into the circuit, the breathing bag inflates.

11. Failure to conduct a proper low/residual pressure warning test 2

15

Close cylinder valve. Watch the display or sentinel unit. The warning should be generated at approximately 700 psi. Alarm sounds intermittently, red indicator flashes. Unplug coupling from tester. Participant will verbally state reading.

12. Failure to conduct a proper battery test 2

On activation and deactivation, the Sentinel automatically checks and displays the battery capacity. To switch off the Sentinel, simultaneously press the right and left hand button until the single sharp audible bleep sounds. Release the buttons. For three seconds, Sentinel shows the battery status. Sentinel switches off.

13. Failure to have Test Apparatus fully assembled. (Ready for use)Note: Breathing hoses do not need to be in straps on test apparatus 2

16

STATEMENTS OF FACT BENCH BG-4 CONTEST

1. A positive pressure leak could be caused by a leakage in or at device

components.

2. The battery in the Sentinel should be replaced every 6 months.

3. Dow Corning 111 is to be used to lubricate O-rings.

4. The pressure relief valve is designed to open when the pressure within the breathing circuit is between +20 and +50 millimeters (+2 mbar and +5 mbar) of pressure measured on the water gage.

5. To prepare for testing adjust zero point of the RZ-25 tester.

6. Test adapter is used to connect the BG-4 apparatus to the RZ-25 tester.

7. A leaky exhalation or inhalation valve could be caused by a defective valve seat or valve disc.

8. During the exhalation valve test, if valve is operating properly, -10 mbar is indicated on the pressure gauge.

9. The EPDM breathing hoses use Bayonet Rings.

10. During testing of the inhalation valve, if valve is operating properly, +10 mbar is indicated on the pressure gauge.

11. During the positive pressure leak test, the pressure change within 1 minute must be lower than 1 mbar.

12. Only DRAGERSORB 400 is to be used to fill the refillable cartridge.

13. The factory packed cartridge is good for 4 years from the manufacture date.

14. A positive pressure in the breathing circuit prevents ambient air from entering the system.

15. The BG-4 is approved with a factory/refillable cartridge.

16. The Sentinel monitoring system comprises a sensor unit, switchbox, and Sentinel.

17. A steel cylinder is full at 3135 psi when a + is stamped at hydro test.

17

18. The BG-4 constant dosage must be 1.5 to 1.9 L/min. 19. The drain valve should not open at less than 10 mbar.

20. A fully filled steel oxygen cylinder holds 440 liters of medical oxygen.

21. The accuracy of the Sentinel pressure measurement is +or- 2% of the final

value.

22. Never replace the battery in potentially explosive areas.

23. The weight of a fully charged BG-4 apparatus is 15kg (33 lbs)

24. Check the supply of oxygen gas on the Sentinel at intervals of

approximately 15 minutes.

25. During the constant dosage test, the breathing bag is inflated, the RZ-25 tester is set to red dosage, and the pressure relief valve is capped.

26. During the constant dosage test, the needle of the RZ-25 tester should automatically settle between 1.5 and 1.9 LPM.

27. The minimum valve provides greater than 80 L/min flow.

28. The breathing bag has a 5.5 liter volume.

29. Insert speech diaphragm, install retainer ring and tighten with spanner.

30. The belt and harness must be dried prior to storage, to prevent growth of mold and fungus.

31. The pressure reducer must be rebuilt/over-hauled every 6 years.

32. Symbol X with error code indicates a failed self-check.

33. The Sentinel converts pressure into digital signal.

34. The cylinder connector and cylinder valve must not be contaminated with oil or grease.

35. Three hexagon socket head screws are used in the battery cover of the Sentinel.

36. Rubber parts must be particularly protected from direct exposure to

radiation.

18

37. Do not use any solvents, such as acetone, alcohol, benzene, white spirit, trichloroethylene, etc. for cleaning rubber and silicone parts.

38. The first low pressure warning occurs when the pressure drops to

approximately 700 psi.

39. At the first low pressure warning approximately 75% of the oxygen has been used up.

40. The last low pressure warning occurs when the pressure drops to approximately 145 psi.

41. During the low pressure warning test, the alarm should activate at approximately 700 PSI for a 4 hour apparatus.

42. At the last low pressure warning approximately 95% of the oxygen has been used up.

43. To start the main alarm, press the Yellow panic button in center of the Sentinel.

44. When the first low pressure warning occurs, the alarm sounds intermittently for approximately 30 seconds and the red LED flashes constantly.

45. When the last low pressure warning occurs, the alarm sounds intermittently without stopping and the red LED flashes constantly.

46. Medium pressure in the BG-4 is between 58 psi and 64 psi.

47. Medium pressure is delivered to the minimum valve.

48. The drain valve opens at more than 10 mbar.

49. The BG-4 breathing circuit is designed with an air cooler that can be filled with ice to reduce the temperature of the inhaled breath.

50 Remove the Tally Key to activate the motion sensor.

51. The venting hole located in the Cover for cooler must point upwards.

52. All parts which come in contact with the exhaled air must be thoroughly cleaned and disinfected after use.

53. Disinfect parts by immersing them in a disinfectant bath using Airkem 33. 54. Before washing the minimum valve, it is necessary to isolate the minimum

valve with plug.

19

55. Attach minimum valve to breathing bag so that the pin of the minimum valve and the mark on the breathing bag line up.

56. All parts which have been disinfected should be rinsed thoroughly under running water.

57. C O2 absorber is not approved for use after indicated expiration date.

58. The maximum temperature of the air used to dry parts should not go above 60 degree C (140 degree F).

59. Replace the high pressure O-ring located on the pressure reducer yearly for units which are in constant use.

60. U.S. D.O.T. hydro test composite cylinders every 5 years.

61. Replace the O-ring at the plug-in coupling at least once every year for units which are in constant use.

62. The inhalation/exhalation valve should be replaced every 3 years for units which are in constant use.

63. The O-ring under the speech diaphragm should be lubricated with Dow Corning 111.

64. The pressure reducer should be returned to the manufacturer or their agent for complete overhaul after at least 6 years usage.

65. A steel oxygen cylinder must be retested by a certified testing facility every 5 years.

66. The BG-4 is approved for use at temperatures above -5 degree C (23 degree F)

67. A defective pressure reducer should be returned to the manufacturer or their agent for service as needed.

68. Only oxygen (medical grade or better) with > 99.5% purity is to be used to fill the BG-4 oxygen cylinders.

69. The use of ice in the cooling system is only required at ambient temperature

above 0 degree C (32 degree F).

70. Pressurized oxygen in contact with oil, grease, or other contamination can result in fire or explosion.

20

71. It is safe to use the BG 4 for up to 4 hours with a battery warning 1 Icon.

72. The battery must be replaced if battery warning 2 Icon is indicated.

73. A defective pressure reducer is the probable cause if the manual by-pass

valve does not blow-off.

74. The green LED flashes to indicate that the Sentinel is operating normally.

75. Bypass output is > 50 L/min.

76. Relief valve activation is 6 bar or (87 psi).

77. The oxygen cylinder Burst disc ruptures at 4,000 psi (275 bar).

78. Refillable cartridge concerns are over packing and under packing.

79. The EPDM and silicone masks allow 90% peripheral vision.

80. Polycarbonate or Plexiglas lenses can be used in the mask.

81. A minimum of 2600 psi is needed for a Sentinel to perform a proper high pressure leak test.

82. The drain valve opens at approximately 15 mbar and is therefore out of the RZ reading range.

83. To prepare the ice pack:

Fill the ice receptacle with water up to 2 inches from rim Freeze at least 16 hours @ -15 degree C (5 degree F)

Fill to rim with water Freeze again for another 8 hours

84. If the speech diaphragm is deformed or shows signs of damage, it must be

replaced.

85. The BG-4 Sentinel lights up when the button is briefly pressed. 86. Press then release the right hand button to display temperature.

87. Do not re-use Factory cartridges.

88. The breathing hoses are equipped with anti-crush rings.

21

89. When conducting component checks use a test pressure between +7 mbar and +10 mbar with a max pressure loss of 1 mbar/min.

90. Only the following batteries are approved for use in the Sentinel:

Rayovac Eveready Panasonic

Ultra-life Lithium

22

BG-4

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Carrying Housing 2 Cover Shell , complete 3 Shoulder Pad Assembly 5 Cooler 6 Relief valve, Complete 7 Minimum Valve 8 Drain Valve 9 Sentinel 10 Switch Box 11 Pressure Sensor

12 Breathing Bag 15 Lever, Complete 16 Factory/refillable cartridge 17 Pressure Reducer BG4 19 Oxygen Cylinder 21 Distribution Hose 22 FPS 7000 Mask

23

Cover

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Cover Shell 2 Hinge

3 Grip Cap 4 Button

24

Harness Assembly

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Shoulder Pad Assembly 2 Shoulder Adjusting Strap 3 Hose Clip 4 Hose Strap Harness

5 Adjusting Belt Assembly 6 Waist belt 7 Belt Assembly 8 Buckle

25

Breathing Hose Assembly

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Coupling 2 Inhalation Valve Seat 3 Exhalation Valve Seat 4 Valve Disc 5 Corrugated Hose

6 Bayonet Ring 7 Anti-Crush rings 8 Toroidal Sealing Ring 9 Sealing Cap

26

Cooling Canister

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Cooler 2 Cover for Cooler 3 Gasket

4 Angle Connector 5 Reaction Ring

27

Drain/Relief/Minimum Valve Assembly

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Valve Disc 2 Crater Case 3 Valve Disc 4 Relief / Drain Valve Spring 5 O-Ring 7 Clamp Fitting 8 Hose 9 Coupling 10 O-Ring

12 Cap 15 Valve Crater 16 Washer 18 Valve Plate 19 Spring 22 Clamp, Minimum Valve 23 Angle Connecter

28

Sentinel

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Sentinel 2 Switch Box 3 Angle Connector 7 Pressure Sensor

8 Copper Ring 9 9 volt battery

13 Tally Key

29

Refillable Cartridge

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1-8 Refillable Cartridge 2 Lid 3 Seal, Refillable Cartridge 4 Strap with Tension Spring Hook

5 Refillable Scrubber Screen 6 Filter Mats 8 NIOSH Approval Label

30

31

FPS 7000 Mask

1 2

Cons. No. Designation

1 2

Cons. No. Designation

1 Mask Body FPS 7000

2 Upper Visor Frame

3 Visor

4 Lower Visor Frame

7 Clamp

8 Connector Piece

9 Cover

11 Turning Knob

12 Disc

13 Inner Mask 14 Button

15A Head Strap

15B Hairnet

16 Sliding Buckle

17 Double Button

18 Neck Strap

32

Oxygen Cylinder

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

3 Valve Housing 10 Hand-wheel 13 Safety Ring

16 Sealing Ring 17 Manometer

18 Lock Washer 19 Lock Nut 20 Bursting Disc 21 Oxygen Cylinder 22 Label

33

Test Kit

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 2 Cons. No. Designation

1 Plug For Breathing Bag 2 Nozzle For Breathing Bag 3 Sealing Plug (Corrugated Hose) 4 Test Socket for Corrugated Hose 5 Sealing Cap for Corrugated Hose 6 Sealing Cap 7 Testing Plug 8 Test Cap for Corrugated Hose 9 Test Connection for Control Valve

11 Sealing Plug for Mask 12 Test Adaptor 13 Sealing Plug for Plug In Conn. 14 Test Hose/Metering Control 19 Sealing Ring Lifters 22 Spanner

SECTION V

2018

Mine Rescue Skills

RULES

Revised 05/01/2018

1

2018 NATIONAL MINE RESCUE SKILLS RULES INDEX

Section I V Title Page

General Rules ............................................................................................................................ 3 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 3 Team Composition ................................................................................................................ 3 Equipment and Materials .................................................................................................... 4 Field Event Rules .................................................................................................................. 4 Rapid Assessment ................................................................................................................. 5 Smoke Exploration Rules ..................................................................................................... 5 Maps ........................................................................................................................................ 6 Discounts and Review .......................................................................................................... 6

Air Measurements Skill Sheet ................................................................................................ 7 Anemometer .......................................................................................................................... 7 Smoke Tube ............................................................................................................................ 7 Magnehelic ............................................................................................................................. 8

Breathing Apparatus Skill Sheet ............................................................................................ 8Firefighting Rules ..................................................................................................................... 9

Firefighting General Rules ................................................................................................... 9 Firefighting Hose Management ........................................................................................ 10 Gas Detectors Skill Sheet .................................................................................................... 11 Smoke Exploration Skill Sheet .......................................................................................... 11 Written Test Skill Sheet ...................................................................................................... 12 First Aid Skill Sheets .............................................................................................................. 13

Skill Requirements ............................................................................................................. 13 Scene Size-Up ......................................................................................................................... 14 Initial Assessment ............................................................................................................... 15 Rapid Assessment/Final Assessment .............................................................................. 16 Care-Vent ................................................................................................................................ 16

Manual Ventilation and Cardiac Compressions ............................................................ 16 Automatic Ventilation ........................................................................................................ 17

CPR ........................................................................................................................................... 18 Life Threatening Bleeding..................................................................................................... 19

External ................................................................................................................................. 19 Internal .................................................................................................................................. 20 Sucking Chest Wound ........................................................................................................ 20 Shock ..................................................................................................................................... 21 Open Wounds ...................................................................................................................... 21 Burns ..................................................................................................................................... 22

2

Fractures ............................................................................................................................... 23 Rib Fracture .......................................................................................................................... 23 Skull or Spinal Fracture ...................................................................................................... 23 Four Man Log Roll .............................................................................................................. 24

3

GENERAL RULES 2018 NATIONAL MINE RESCUE SKILLS CONTESTS

Introduction

The National Mine Rescue Skills contest utilizes skills taken from the Nationwide Skills and IG 7a. The intent is to provide competition in skills not covered in Mine Rescue contests and may or may not be compliant with IG 7a or nationwide contests.

The skills contest will consist of 4 separate events. Smoke exploration in the Academy Mine Lab, firefighting exercises at the Academy fire pits, first aid/preliminaries in the classrooms at the academy and a field event on the mine rescue fields. There will be isolation for the mine rescue field event and the smoke room exercise.

Mine rescue teams must be composed of persons who are bonafide employees of mining companies or persons who are designated or contracted by mining companies to fulfill the requirements of 30 CFR Part 49 mine rescue coverage.

Teams will be pre scheduled for working order and rotation between the 4 event sites. Teams will receive their rotation schedule when they register.

A written test for mine rescue exercise (statement of facts) will be given to the teams at 6:30 am to 7:00 am.

A written test as described in the preliminary rules will be given to the teams beginning at 6:30 am during smoke room exercise isolation.

All events will start at 8:00 am.

Teams will receive any written and verbal information concerning the events at the end of the written test.

Team Composition

1. Team members cannot be substituted for the different skills events.

2. Only the six working members registered by the team and the briefing officer will workon the problem.

3. If a team member has a physical problem, they can be replaced by an alternate ifavailable.

4

Equipment and Materials

1. Teams are required to bring with them sufficient and materials to work the problem.

2. Team uniforms will consist of:

A. Outer clothing will be one or two piece with long sleeves and pants, a 6 ozminimum weight and Fire Retardant (FR) rating.

B. Standard mine hard hats and boots.

C. Fire Retardant (FR) gloves (at the fire pits)

D. Fire Retardant (FR)rated hood (at the fire pits)

3. Team members are not required to have numbers on their uniforms.

Mine Rescue Field Event

The Mine Rescue Field Event will comply with the 2018 Mine Rescue rules with the following additions:

1. Treatment of a life-threatening condition encountered during the working of theproblem.

2. Life threatening conditions are those referred to in the first-aid skill sheet (spinal injurieswill not be included in the mine rescue field first aid).

3. Teams will only be required to perform a rapid patient assessment as listed belowduring the mine rescue field exercise.

4. Only patients that are identified as having life threatening conditions will requireassessment and treatment.

5. Patients with life threatening conditions will be identified with a card, envelope andlabel.

6. Teams must provide materials to treat life threatening injuries.

7. The captain will not be allowed to assist in the rapid assessment and/or treatment of thepatient.

8. Teams are not allowed to take the Skill Sheets onto the field.

5

RAPID ASSESSMENT

A Rapid Patient Assessment will be performed prior to the patient being transported. This assessment is to determine any life threatening injuries. Treatment must start immediately on life threatening injuries as they are located.

Rapid Assessment Skill Sheet

STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Examine for life threatening injuries

Verbalize each area examined

Check Head 1

Check Neck 1

Check Chest 1

Check Abdomen 1

Check Pelvis 1

Check Legs 1

Check Arms 1

Check Back Surfaces 1

9. Anytime stretchers are transported through water they must be elevated to above thelevel of water.

SMOKE EXPLORATION RULES

1. Each team must explore an area of the mine not to exceed 30 minutes.

2. All mines will have the same numbers of objects or placards with information tobe located by the team. Each mine may have different objects or placards indifferent locations.

3. Teams may be required to crawl.

4. The briefing officer map and team map will be scored. The 2018 National Mine RescueRules Map Legend will be used. The team and the briefing officer cannot visuallycompare their maps after explorations begin.

5. Map items must be located in the general area where found. General area is defined asthis: If an object or placard is on the right rib between break 1 and break 2 anywherealong the right rib in this location will be acceptable. Showing it on the opposite rib oranother are will be discounted. Items located in an intersection must be mapped in theintersection.

6

6. Teams must use approved Sound Powered Communications Systems or MSHAprovided IWT Communications Radios for this exercise.

MAPS

1. After the Captain starts the clock, the team will be given written instructions, and mapsas follows:

A. For the smoke room event 1 map for the briefing officer and 2 maps for the team.

B. For the field event 1 map for the briefing officer and 1 map for the team.

C. No maps are required for the fire pit events or the preliminaries.

DISCOUNTS AND REVIEW

1. All events will be timesd. The captain will start and stop a time clock. The team will geta 1 point discount for each minute or fraction of a minute of working time forfirefighting and preliminary exercises. The mine rescue field and smoke room exerciseworking time will be used for tie breaking purposes only.

2. Team’s total discounts will be a combination of skill sheet discounts, one discount foreach minute or fraction of a minute of working time (where required) and mapdiscounts. Skill sheet discounts will be the first tie breaker, map discounts the secondand working time the third.

3. Teams will be notified when they can review their score cards and maps. Teams have 30minutes to review and must start their review within one hour after being notified.

4. If a team stops the clock before the events are completed, the team will receive theapplicable discounts for all parts of the problem not completed.

5. Failure to follow written instructions will result in 5 discounts for each instruction.

At the beginning of the preliminary events the team will draw two team members from the five working members and briefing officer to perform the gas detector, air and pressure readings, and two man bench skills.

7

AIR MEASUREMENTS SKILL SHEET

1. The air measurement Competition will be held with the preliminaries.

2. The air direction will be provided by the judge.

3. Teams will be required to provide all necessary equipment.

ANEMOMETER

1. Teams will be required to take air readings with an Anemometer.

A. Failure to provide anemometer, measuring tape and timing device _____1discount

B. Failure to give a brief description of the anemometer (how to zero and turn onthe anemometer). _____1

C. Failure to take a measurement of the area to be tested. _____1

D. Failure to traverse the entry while taking a 1 minute reading in the area. _____1

The judge will give the area and velocity to the team.

E. Failure to calculate correctly the air reading for the area (air reading must becalculated with pencil or pen and submitted to the Judge). No calculators will beallowed. _____1

SMOKE TUBES

1. Teams will be required to take air readings with a smoke tube.

A. Failure to provide smoke tubes with aspirator bulb, measuring tape _____1

B. Failure to measure off a distant (10 foot) ____1

C. Failure of team members to verbally explain how smoke will be released andtimed through each of the four quadrants. _____1

D. Failure to take measurement of area to be tested _____1

The judge will give the team the area and travel time of the smoke.

8

E. Failure to calculate smoke air reading for the area (air reading must be calculatedwith pencil or pen and submitted to the judge) _____1

MAGNEHELIC

1. Teams will be required to take a pressure reading with a Magnehelic.

A. Failure to provide a Magnehelic and necessary port hoses and fittings. _____1

B. Failure to explain what the Magnehelic is used to measure. _____1

C. Failure to demonstrate how to zero the Magnehelic. _____1

For contest purposes, all returns will be low pressure and all intakes will be high pressure. Teams will be given information on their location and area to be tested.

D. Failure to connect the hoses to Magnehelic properly and simulate the reading._____1

Judge will have a preset Magnehelic properly and simulate the reading.

E. Failure to give and explain the proper reading of the Magnehelic to the judge(positive or negative pressure should be included in the explanation) _____1

BREATHING APPARATUS SKILL SHEET

1. The two person Breathing Apparatus Competition will be held during thepreliminaries.

2. Two team members will be selected from the 5 working team members and briefingofficer.

3. Failure to completely dissemble apparatus. _____1

Failure to completely assemble apparatus ____1

Failure to fill chemical cartridge during assembly _____1

Failure to use a properly charged O2 cylinder _____1

4. Team members may use the apparatus manual during testing. Failure to perform alltests required for the apparatus, this includes a face mask test. _____1

9

5. Teams must provide all materials and equipment needed to complete this skill. _____1

6. Teams will be allowed 30 minutes for this competition.

7. Failure to compete will result in an additional 15 point discount. _____15

FIREFIGHTING RULES

1. Teams will compete in a lance installation exercise and a hose exercise.

FIREFIGHTING GENERAL RULES

1. Any team member between a pressurized hose and rib._____2

2. Any team member not having hold of the fire hose when in smoke._____5

3. Any team member turning their back to the fire while fighting the fire or

retreating from the fire. (Defined as both feet pointed away from the fire) _____5

4. Failure to have nozzle on fog pattern when advancing on the fire. (team must

verbalize to Judges)_____2

5. Failure to don firefighting gear when advancing on fire or installing lance. (noskin showing)

No FR _____2 No FR gloves _____2 No FR Hood _____2

6. Failure to advance in unison when two hand lines are used._____2

7. Failure to street roll fire hose and place hose, nozzles and lance in location it was

found._____10

8. Failure to roll fire hose into a tight roll with male end inside the roll._____2

9. Failure of team to install the lance before advancing on the fire._____5

10. Failure to bring an extra apparatus._____2

10

11. Starting and stopping the clock to avoid discounts._____30

Firefighting Hose Management

1. Failure to flush the Y connector prior to connecting the fire hose or flushing the

fire hose prior to connecting the nozzle._____2

2. Any team member stepping on the pad while moving the box around the cones

during the Z pattern shoot ._____2

3. Any box that crosses the wrong side of a cone during the Z pattern shoot and is

not returned to the correct side of the cone before proceeding to the next cone.

(Team can return the cone with water pressure with no discounts or have the

judge return with 2 discounts)

4. Any team member stepping on or crossing the yellow mid line while the box is

being moved during the goal post shoot._____2

5. If the box is moved off the pad by water pressure during the Z pattern shoot, it

must be put back on the pad by use of water pressure.

Moving the box back onto the pad by any other means will constitute a 10 pointdiscount.

Note 1: The 6 man team will work in two 3 man teams.

Note 2: If any member of the 3 person team determines the box is hung up ornot spray able while on the concrete pad during the Z pattern shoot, that personmust notify the judges, and the judges will return the box to the cone nearest theyellow mid line without a discount but the clock will continue to run.

Note 3: If the box is moved off the pad adjacent to the goal posts by waterpressure during the goal post shoot, it will be returned by the judges to the conenearest the yellow mid line without a discount but the clock will continue to run.

Note 4: If any member of the 3 person team determines the box is hung up ornot spray able while on the concrete pad during the goal post shoot, that personmust notify the judges, and the judges will return the box to the cone nearest theyellow mid line without a discount but the clock will continue to run.

11

Gas Detectors Skill Sheet

1. The Gas Test Competition will be held during the preliminaries.

2. Two team members will be selected from the 5 working members and the

briefing officer.

3. Team members must make the following checks. 1 discount will be assessed for

each check not completed.

Visual Damage _____1 discount Power detector up _____1 discount Battery Test _____1 discount Detector range of gases in % or PPM _____1 discount Calibration gas setting (set span) _____1 discount Alarm settings (describe how to set) _____1 discount Zero unit and calibrate _____1 discount Proper in-date cal gas and proper regulator _____1 discount Readings within 10% accuracy _____1 discount Reset peaks _____1 discount

4. Team members will perform checks and calibration as per their manual and read

gas for Methane, Oxygen and Carbon Monoxide.

5. Detectors will be high and low range as required by MSHA. Teams can have one

detector that is high and low range or two detectors, one high and one low.

Teams should use detectors that they will use in Mine Rescue work.

6. Failure to have one high and low range detector or one high range detector and

one low range detector _____10 discounts

Smoke Exploration Skill Sheet

1. Any team member not mechanically attached to the lifeline while in smoke.

_____2

2. Failure to locate objects/placards accurately

2 discounts each object/placard on the team map 2 discounts each object/placard on the briefing officer map

12

3. Not following proper procedures while going under oxygen, 50 foot check or 20

minute checks.

Discounted according to 2018 National Mine Rescue Rules

4. Failure to have the face piece sealed other than at the fresh air base._____10

5. Failure to systematically explore the mine intersection by intersection, including

crosscuts prior to moving inby to the next intersection._____5 each occurrence

6. Failure to return immediately to the fresh air base in the event of a breathing

apparatus failure._____10

7. Failure to follow written instructions_____5 each occurrence

Written Test Skill Sheet

1. The Skills Written Test will be held at the beginning of the Smoke Competition.

2. Failure to answer a question correctly. Each wrong answer. _______2

3. The 5 team members and briefing officer will take a 10 question written test.

4. The test will be open book and taken from the following reference books :

A. IG-7 (3028) Manual for Mine Rescue training – Coal (2013)

B. IG-7a (2013)

C. Mine Fires Prevention-Detection-Fighting, Don Mitchell 3rd

edition.

D. National Mine Rescue Skills First Aid Skills Sheets

5. Teams must furnish their own reference books and electronic devices are prohibited.

6. There will be a 25 minute time limit for the written test and the time taken for the test will not be added to the preliminary time.

13

7. Teams must be isolated from each other until all tests are complete.

First Aid Skill Sheet

Skill Requirements

1. Materials List

12 Triangular Bandages

6 Adhesive compresses

12 Sterile gauze, (4”x4”) and/or 4” Compresses

6 Roller Bandages

2 Blankets

1 Disposable Blanket

1 Scissors, EMT Utility

6 Pairs of Examination Gloves

2 Mask/face shields or masks and goggles combination meeting blood borne pathogen requirements (mine rescue apparatus face mask suffices)

1 Compliment of splints (may be pre-padded but not assembled)

1 Long back board with straps (Aluminum, Wood, etc.)(Cravat bandages or straps cannot be preassembled on the back board)

1 Burn Sheet, Sterile (40” x 80” minimum)

1 Rigid Extrication Collar

2 Trauma Dressings (minimum of 10” x 30”)

2 Tourniquets

2 Occlusive Dressing

1 Care- Vent

1 Packet sugar/tube of instant glucose (for diabetic purposes)

Wheeled stretchers can be used to carry supplies; however, patients cannot be transported on wheeled stretcher to the FAB. Patient must be transported using a back-board, basket stretcher, stokes, etc “patient must be secured and carried to the FAB”.

2. Teams must clean all materials from the mine after completion of the problem.

3. Life threatening injuries are: difficulties in breathing, spinal injury, skull fracture,open/sucking chest wound, life threatening bleeding, shock or life threatening openfractures.

14

4. Teams must treat all life threating injuries before transport to the fresh air base and anyother time during the problem before the clock is stopped.

5. Teams must furnish all materials from the materials list.

6. If CPR is part of the problem, a care-vent on a manikin must be used, contest official mustprovide manikin.

7. Teams must follow any written instructions given to them.

8. Protective equipment must be donned prior to patient contact (gloves, masks, and eyeprotection – eyeglasses are acceptable). (Apparatus face shield will be considered eyeprotection)

9. Teams are required to perform an Initial Assessment and rapid assessment inby the freshair base and a detailed assessment at the fresh air base.

Failure to comply with the above 9 requirements will result in a 5 point discount foreach infraction

10. Judges must be very clear to the teams if an injury is life threatening.

11. Injuries will be identified by card, envelopes or labels attached to the patient at or as nearthe location of the injury as possible or envelopes handed to the team at a required timeor location. Injury descriptions and if it is life threatening will be bold letters and at least¼ -inch in height.

12. Tail Captain does not have to remain stationary. He can move to assist in treatment ofinjuries.

13. The Captain’s primary responsibility is to declare the area safe; he can verbally assist theteam as they perform first aid.

14. All required first aid treatment must be scored by the attached skill sheets.

SCENE SIZE-UP

STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Scene Safety Observe the area to ensure team and patient safety * (Captain Verbalizes Area is Safe) 1

Team protection

Don protective gloves and/or any other protection if needed to protect against blood borne pathogens. ( BSI) 1

15

Mechanism of Injury

If possible, determine what forces caused the injury or evidence of a medical problem. *

Ask patient (if conscious) what happened 1

Communication Notify the Briefing Officer/Command Center of the location of the injured person. 1

INITIAL ASSESSMENT

STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Stabilization of Spine

During the assessment avoid unnecessary movement or rough handling of patient (Apply manual immobilization to neck if suspected spine injury)

1

Assess mental status

Determine if patient is alert and responsive or nonresponsive* * (Verbally describe the level of consciousness) 1

Assess airway

Look for absence of breathing (no chest rise and fall), or breathing less than 6 or more than 24 breaths per minute.

Unconscious Patient: Ensure airway is open by feeling air from nose or mouth or failure of chest or abdomen to rise and fall or skin is blue or gray

Conscious Patient: * Verbalize that airway has been assessed

Correctly execute head-tilt/chin-lift or jaw thrust maneuver, depending on the presence of cervical spine (neck) injuries

If present, treat sucking chest wound Card will be given to team when checking the chest area for breathing.(refer to skill sheet)

1

1

Assess circulation

Unconscious Patient: Check carotid pulse* (5 – 10 seconds)

Note: If no pulse perform CPR (refer to skill sheet)

Conscious Patient: * Verbalize circulation has been assessed

1

Check for Bleeding

Visual examination of patient (rapid head to toe visual assessment)

Judges must identify life threatening bleeding on placard (will be at

1

16

least ¼ inch and in RED)

Note: Stop and Treat serious bleeding if found (refer to skill sheet)

RAPID ASSESSMENT/FINAL ASSESSMENT

A Rapid Patient Assessment will be performed after the initial assessment has been performed and before the patient is transported to the Fresh Air Base (FAB). This assessment is to determine any life threatening injuries. Treatment must start immediately on life threatening injuries as they are located.

A Final Assessment must be performed at the Fresh Air Base before the clock stops.

The Skill Sheet below is for Rapid and Final Assessment.

STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Examine for life threatening injuries

Verbalize each area examined

Check Head 1

Check Neck 1

Check Chest 1

Check Abdomen 1

Check Pelvis 1

Check Legs 1

Check Arms 1

Check Back Surface 1

CARE-VENT - Manual ventilation and cardiac compressions

STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Preparing Patient

Allow the device to cycle once and then apply the full face mask or attach the Care Vent DRA to the patient’s full face mask. A tilt action is used to hyper-extend the neck and move the jaw forward. This helps displace the tongue away from the back of the throat and maintain an open airway.

If the patient’s chest does not rise or the gas escapes around the mask or the pressure relief system operator, reposition the patient’s head and adjust your hand position to obtain an effective mask and an open airway.

1

1

1

17

If mask indicates signs of vomit, remove immediately and clear the airway. Ensure the mask and valve is free from obstruction. Restart ventilation immediately after cleaning airway.

Ventilation If manual ventilation is to be used, depress the manual button and observe the rise of the patient’s chest. Release the button when the chest rise is adequate.

1

Evaluation If no respiratory effort is observed, position yourself above the patient’s head. Turn on the gas supply. Monitor the patient’s skin, nail bed and lip color.

1 1

CARE-VENT - Automatic ventilation STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Preparing Patient

Allow the device to cycle once and then apply the full face mask or attach the Care Vent DRA to patient’s full face mask. A tilt action is used to hyper extend the neck and move the jaw forward. This helps displace the tongue away from the back of the throat and maintains an open airway.

1

Ventilation

Continue ventilation at an appropriate rate until relieved or spontaneous breathing returns. If mask indicates signs of vomit, remove immediately and clear the airway. Ensure the mask and valve is free from obstruction. Restart ventilation immediately after cleaning airway.

1 1

Evaluation If no respiratory effort is observed, position yourself above the patient’s head. Turn on the gas.

1

18

CPR STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Establish Unresponsiveness

Tap or gently shake shoulders

“Are you OK?” *

1

Determine Patient is not breathing

Determine unconsciousness without compromising possible cervical spine (neck) injury

1

Look , listen, feel for absence of breathing (no chest rise and fall) or gasping, which are not considered adequate

1

Checks for Pulse

Correctly locate the carotid pulse - on the side of the rescuer, locate the patient’s windpipe with your index and middle fingers and slide your fingers in the groove between the windpipe and muscle in the neck

1

Start Chest Compressions

Locate the compression point on the breastbone between the nipples

1

Start Chest Compressions

Place the heel of one hand on the compression point and the other hand on top of the first so hands are parallel

1

Do not intentionally rest fingers on the chest 1

Keep heel of your hand on chest during and between compressions

1

Give 30 compressions 1

Compressions are at the rate of at least 100 per minute (30 compressions delivered within 18 seconds)

1

Compression depth. at least 2 inched for an adult 1

Ventilations Between Compressions

Kneel at the patient’s side near the head

1

Ventilations Between Compressions

Correctly execute head-tilt/ chin-lift or jaw thrust maneuver depending on the presence of cervical spine injuries

1

Place barrier device (pocket mask/shield with one way valve/Care-Vent) on manikin

1

Give 2 breaths 1 second each 1

Complete breaths and return to compressions in less than 10 seconds (This will be measured from the end of last down stroke to the start of the first down stroke of the next cycle.)

1

Provide 5 cycles of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths 1

Continue Chest Compressions

To check for pulse, stop chest compressions for no more than 10 seconds after the first set of CPR

1

19

Continue Chest Compressions

If no signs of circulation are detected, continue chest compressions and breaths and check for signs of circulation after each set

1

Continue Chest Compressions

A maximum of 10 seconds will be allowed to complete ventilations and required pulse checks between sets (this will be measured from the end of the last down stroke to the start of the first down stroke of the next cycle)

1

LIFE THREATENING BLEEDING External STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Direct pressure

Takes appropriate body substance isolation 1

Cover wound with a clean cloth or your gloved hand and apply direct pressure on the wound If controlled, bandage dressing in place, if not controlled continue skill

1

NOTE: If not controlled, Judge must now inform the person that the wound continues to bleed

Elevation If wound is on an arm or leg and there is no fracture, elevate extremity above heart level as you apply pressure unless spine injury is suspected.

1

NOTE: If not controlled, Judge must now inform the person that the wound continues to bleed

Tourniquets Apply between the wound and the heart as close to the wound as possible (Approximately 1 inch above the wound) but never over a joint. Tighten till bleeding is controlled. Do not loosen. Make note of time applied. Mark T or TK on forehead. Improvised Tourniquet:

Apply a bandage around the extremity above the wound (one inch above but not on a joint) and tie a half knot in the bandage.

Place a stick or pencil on top of the knot and tie the ends of the bandage over the stick in a square knot.

1

20

Twist the stick until the bleeding is controlled, secure the stick in position.

Factory Tourniquet:

Apply per manufacturer recommendation above the wound (one inch above but not on a joint)

Shock Verbally state that person will be treated for shock (refer to shock skill sheet)

LIFE THREATENING BLEEDING Internal STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Examination Monitor breathing and pulse

1

Treatment Keep patient still Loosen restrictive clothing Nothing by mouth Treat for shock (Refer to shock skill sheet)

1 1 1 1

Transport Transport to fresh air base as soon as possible 1

SUCKING CHEST WOUND STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Expose wound

Expose entire wound 1

Seal wound and control bleeding

Apply direct pressure “gloved hand” as needed to stop the bleeding

1

Apply an occlusive dressing

Place occlusive dressing over wound Ensure dressing is large enough not to be sucked into the wound

1

Seal on three sides - Affix dressing with tape 1

Monitor “Monitor patient closely for increasing difficulty breathing” 1

21

Patient if breathing becomes difficult “shallow or rapid” release dressing and have patient exhale - reseal

Place the patient on the injured side to allow expansion room for the uninjured lung if there is no spinal injury or other injuries would prohibit

1

Transport Transport to fresh air base as soon as possible 1 SHOCK STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Assess for Shock

Assess for shock and verbally state treatment for shock 1

Treatment Keep victim lying down 1

Cover with blanket to prevent loss of body heat 1

Elevate according to injury This procedure is performed in most cases. Place the patient flat, face up and elevate the legs or foot end of the back board 8 to 12 inches. Do not elevate any limbs with possible fractures or pelvic injuries until they have been properly splinted and/or placed on a spinal board. Remember to consider the mechanism of injury for every patient. Do not elevate feet if you are treating a person with: head injury, heart attack, stroke, or chest injuries

1

Reassure and calm the patient 1

OPEN WOUNDS STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Control Bleeding

Use direct pressure to control bleeding 1

Dressing Apply sterile dressing over entire wound 1

Do not remove dressing, if bleeding continues apply additional dressings directly over first dressing

1

Bandaging Cover all edges of dressing (dressings completely covered) 1

Do not bandage too tightly. 1

Do not bandage too loosely. 1

Do not cover tips of fingers and toes, unless they are injured. 1

Embedded Do not remove embedded objects unless obstructing airway. 1

22

objects

Stabilize with a bulky dressing 1

If object is too large to transport, cut off only enough to allow for transportation

1

Check for exit wound 1

Impaled Objects in the Cheek

Examine; inside & outside 1

If end not impaled in mouth - pull it out 1

Position head for drainage: if spinal injury, immobilize 1st and tilt board

1

Dress outside of wound 1

Gauze on inside only if patient alert, (Simulate only in contest and state, "I would leave 3-4 inches of gauze outside of mouth.")

1

BURNS STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Type of Burn

Determine Type of Burn – Thermal, Electrical, Chemical 1

Burn Care (All Types)

Keep site clean and keep the patient warm 1

Separate Sites - burned areas that might come in contact with each other when bandaging

1

Remove jewelry 1

Apply moist dressings to first and second degree burns. Dry dressings to third degree burns

1

Do not apply ointment, sprays, butter or ice to burned areas 1

Do not break blisters 1

Chemical burns

Brush off dry powders 1 Consider flushing with large amounts of water 1

Electrical burns

Ensure safety before removing patient from the electrical source

1

Look for both an entrance and exit wound 1

Monitor the patient closely for respiratory and cardiac arrest 1

23

Fractures STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Assess Injured Area

Examine possible inured site for signs and symptoms of fracture:

1

Assess for circulation and movement below the fractured site 1

Immobilize suspected fracture

Splint in position found - Do not attempt to straighten any painful, swollen, deformed extremity.

1

Provide manual immobilization - immobilize the limb and apply splint

1

Check that splints are long enough to support joints above and below suspected fracture

1

Pad improvised splints to ensure even contact and pressure between the limb and the splint.

1

Secure fractured area to splint by applying bandaging material above and below the fractured site

1

Secure all splinted/fractured limbs for transport 1

Re-Assess for circulation and movement below the fractured site

1

RIB FRACTURE STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Assess Patient for Possible rib fracture

Assess for severe pain with each breath 1

Tenderness over fracture 1

Deformity at site of fracture 1

Inability to take a deep breath 1

Treatment

Apply thick padding over injured ribs 1

Apply two medium cravat bandages around the chest firmly enough to afford support centering the cravats on either side of the injury

1

Support the arm on the injured side in a sling 1 SKULL OR SPINAL FRACTURE STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Assessment Determine if patient is to be treated for possible skull or spinal injuries; This includes: All unconscious patients

1

24

Deformity of the skull Open Wound – Clear fluid coming from ears and/or nose Pupils may be unequal in size; impaired vision Partial or complete paralysis

Treatment Manually stabilize the head until patient is secured to your backboard

1

Use modified jaw thrust to open airway if the airway is compromised

1

Apply cervical collar. 1

Transport Position patient on backboard (Refer to log roll skill sheet) 1

Secure patient to backboard The patient must have his head, arms, pelvic area, upper legs and both legs below the knees secured to the stretcher. Straps or cravats must be used. Note: Patient MUST be secured to back board to prevent movement during transport. If patient is allowed to move/slide/etc. on back board during transport discount for endangering patient. Example: If during transport the backboard is tilted and the patient slides on back board.

1

Use blanket roll, padding, rolled up coats, etc. to stabilize the head and neck

1

Treat for shock ( use shock skill sheet) 1 FOUR MAN LOG ROLL STEP ACTION DISCOUNT

Prepare for the Roll

Stabilize the neck and head and open airway by modified jaw-thrust

1

Place spine board parallel to the patient 1

Position one person at the shoulder, one at waist and one at the knee

1

Shoulder rescuer extends patient’s arm over the head on the side the patient will be rolled

1

Rescuers will place hands under patient’s shoulder, upper arm, waist, buttocks, knees and mid-calf

1

25

Roll Roll patient in unison on side toward the rescuers 1

Waist rescuer pulls spine board against patient 1

On command roll patient as a unit onto board 1

SECTION VI

2018

Preshift

RULES

2018 PRESHIFT CONTEST

RULES INDEX

Section VI

Title Page

Rules Governing 2018 Preshift Contest and Interpretations of Discount Cards ............... 1

Interpretation of the Field Scorecard ........................................................................................ 5

Interpretation of the Preshift Record ........................................................................................ 9

Statements of Fact (Preshift Contest) ..................................................................................... 10

1

RULES GOVERNING 2018 PRESHIFT CONTEST

AND INTERPRETATIONS OF DISCOUNT CARDS

1. Contestant must be a bona fide employee of a mining company or contractor

and be certified as a mine foreman or examiner. Proof of certification must be presented at time of registration. Card, certificate, etc. will be accepted. If such proof is not provided prior to the contest, the participant will not be allowed to compete.

2. Judges will be employees of the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and other assisting State Agencies.

3. Contestant must bring safety cap, safety boots, mining belt with identification tag, check-in tag, MSHA approved cap light, SCSR (may use training model, M20 or out of service SCSR as long as the contestant informs the judges of the specific defect[s]), anemometer, watch (with second hand or equivalent), an MSHA approved device to detect explosive and dangerous gases and/or deficiencies of oxygen, a device for testing the roof, distance/area measuring devices, blank index cards (recommend at least 50, may be numbered) for placing dates, times and initials and writing instruments for recording their work. If a contestant cannot provide an SCSR due to air travel restrictions, you should notify the registrar upon sending the registration form and an SCSR will be provided. Contestant may bring personal items to the field provided the items do not contain prohibited information. Prohibited information means, but is not limited to, rules, calculating charts (i.e. ventilation formulas), and personal (“reminder”) notes.

4. A contest point system has been established. Failure to find/correct deficiencies or hazards, if necessary, failure of the contestant to verbally identify work, tests, or action being taken to the judge or failure to report on the record page will be assessed discounts. The accumulation of discounts will establish the contestants ranking in the contest. Three scoring segments will be used during the contest: written examination, underground, and the preshift record page.

5. Preshift contestants shall be notified by posting when they may review the discounts and have the right to appeal in writing to the Chief Judge. Within one hour of posting, the contestant shall report to the designated location and may be accompanied by the trainer. Contestants will have 20 minutes to review and prepare any written protests. The Chief Judge will have final decision on all appeals.

6. All contestants will take a written examination. The examination will consist of 10 multiple choice questions with three choices, taken from the published statements of fact. Contestants will have 15 minutes to complete the written examination. One point will be discounted for each incorrect statement.

2

Answers will not be intentionally misspelled. “None of the above” shall not be used as one of the choices. Each statement shall contain a blank space which shall represent a key word, with no more than two consecutive blanks per statement.

7. A fireboss station will be provided. Two stopwatches or one clock and a stopwatch will be at the station. The contestant will start one, and a stopwatch will be started and carried by a Judge. The contestant(s) will be allowed to position their equipment at the fireboss station. When the contestant arrives at the field the blank map, a written statement and mine plans and notes made by the contestant required for working the problem will be returned to the contestant. Upon receipt of these materials the contestant must start the clock within 2 minutes.

8. A maximum working time of 30 minutes will be in effect for the underground portion of the contest. The contestant will be notified when there are five minute(s) left to complete the problem.

9. The portion of the mine to be examined will be addressed in a briefing prior to working the problem.

10. If during the problem, date, time and initials need to be posted, the information shall be written on an index card and the card placed on the mine floor at the required location. The contestant’s personal watch time will be the time used on the card.

11. The contestant’s personal watch time will be the time used on the preshift record for time of examination.

12. Placards, objects, mine plans and/or maps will be used to indicate equipment, conditions or potential hazards. The lettering on the placards will be at least one-inch in height. Contestants will not remove any items or placards unless specifically addressed in the problem. For contest purposes only, all violations of 30 CFR, Part 75 will be considered a hazard.

13. During the working of the problem, contestants shall correct conditions or hazards, where means or materials have been provided. Where conditions can be corrected by physically moving an item or ventilation device, such action need not be indicated on an index card. Where conditions are not corrected, danger signs will be shown on index cards and placed on the mine floor. If multiple hazardous conditions exist in one area or entry, a separate danger card must be placed on the mine floor for each hazard. EXAMPLE OF DANGER SIGNS

DANGER UNSAFE ROOF 01/06/2018 10:00 a.m.

REH

DANGER UNSAFE RIB 01/06/2018 10:15 a.m.

REH

3

14. The contestant will be provided linear feet, width and height, or area dimensions, where air measurements are required during the working of the problem. Air measurements will be simulated, using the traverse method, for a minimum of 60-seconds. Calculators or similar devices will be allowed. Only whole numbers will be required to be stated in the preshift record.

15. Once the underground segment is completed, the contestant shall exit the mine, check out, stop the clock, and will be escorted to the assigned area to fill out a preshift record page. Contestant will not be allowed to reenter the mine after stopping the clock. Contestant will have 20-minutes to complete the preshift record. Upon completion of the record, the contestant will turn-in the preshift record page and the section working map. Discounts will be assessed for each item not recorded within the allotted time.

16. In the event an unforeseen problem arises, the time clock will be stopped, and the contestant will be removed from the field and taken to a neutral area. Following correction, the contestant will be returned to the field to complete the problem, and the time clock will be restarted. The field judges, prior to the completion of the problem, will adjust any discrepancies in the working time. At the completion of the problem the contestant will be notified of any corrective actions concerning the working time.

17. Each Contestant must be under guard, in a designated location before the start of the contest. Contestants must remain continuously under guard until time to work the problem. Prior to going out to the field to work the problem, contestant will be moved into a staging area and given a blank map, a written statement and mine plans required for working the problem. The contestant will be given 10 minutes to review the material and make any notes they deem necessary. At the end of 10 minutes the blank map, written statement and mine plans and notes will be collected by a contest official. The blank map, written statement, notes and mine plans will be returned to the contestant when they arrive to start the problem. Contestants that have performed will not be permitted to return to the isolation area or to communicate with any contestant awaiting their turn to perform.

18. No unauthorized person(s) will be allowed in the isolation area or on the contest field without permission from the Chief Judge.

19. Discounts will be assessed if the preshift record page is not legible to the judges.

20. In the event of a tie, underground discounts will be the first tie breaker, preshift record will be the second, written examination will be the third, and the elapsed working time will be the fourth tie breaker.

21. All discounts assessed to the contestant will be concurred by the two Field Judges.

22. Judges should not talk with contestants during the working of the problem, other than to convey required information.

4

23. Immediately after briefing, no communication between contestant and any outside party will be allowed. Contestants receiving contest information after entering the isolation area will be disqualified.

24. Contestant shall not take any cell phones, computers, pagers etc. into the isolation area. Contestant may take reference material into the isolation area but cannot be used in the staging area. The contestant may not use any of this reference material when working the problem or taking a written exam. Contestants will not carry personal notebooks into the contest area.

25. All gas detecting instruments used or taken into the mine must be examined in the presence of the judges at the fireboss station after starting the clock. (Gas detecting instruments will be left on during the working of the problem.) If an instrument fails during the examination and the contestant takes corrective action with a backup instrument that has been examined in the presence of the judges, no discount will be assessed.

If an instrument fails any part of the test the contestant will receive a 2 point discount under Rule 14. If a spare detector is used and works properly, the discount will not apply. Contestants using a detector that was discounted under Rule 14 would not be discounted for gas test during the preshift contest.

26. Persons wishing to photograph or video tape the contest must receive permission from the Chief Judge.

5

INTERPRETATION OF THE FIELD SCORECARD 1. Failure to check in after starting the clock (2) and check out prior to stopping the

clock (2). Maximum of 4

Contestant must start the time clock before commencing any work other than reviewing the materials provided by the judges.

2. Failure to have required equipment 2

Required equipment is safety cap, safety boots, mining belt with ID tag, check-in tag, cap light, SCSR, anemometer, watch (with second hand or equivalent) and a MSHA approved device to detect explosive and dangerous gases and/or deficiencies of oxygen, a device for testing the roof, distance/area measuring devices, blank index cards (recommend at least 50, may be numbered) for placing dates, times and initials and writing instruments for recording their work. Contestant shall have required equipment prior to leaving isolation area. A discount will be assessed for each omitted item.

3. Failure to visually examine self-contained self-rescuer prior to entering the mine 2

4. Failure to place date, time, and initials at required locations 2 (each location)

Date, time and initials are to be placed where methane tests are required and on danger signs.

Date means correct month, day, and year.

Where hazard(s) are found and gas tests are required at the same location, only one date, time and initial is required.

5. Failure to make necessary gas tests where required. 5

Methane and oxygen deficiency tests shall be taken:

A. In all roadways, travelways, and track haulageways where persons are required to work or travel.

B. In all working places on the section and at areas where mechanized mining equipment is being installed or removed.

C. In areas where persons are scheduled to work, prior to the preshift examination.

D. At faces or last row of permanent roof support in rooms driven over 20-feet off intake air courses.

E. At seals along intake air courses.

6

F. At underground electrical installations, except; small hand held portable pumps, permissible pumps and associated permissible switchgear, and submersible pumps.

G. Immediately inby approaches to worked-out areas along intake air courses, and at high spots where methane is likely to accumulate, and equipment will be operated in the area during the shift.

H. In all accessible face areas, at the face or last row of permanent roof support.

I. Where the ventilation has been changed to remove excess methane (1% or greater) and/or oxygen deficiency (less than 19.5%), the examiner shall retest at the location of all placards where the gases were encountered during the initial examination.

If a placard is not present where a gas test is required the reading shall be 0.0% CH4 and 20.9% O2.

6. Improper procedure when testing with gas detectors, testers, and indicators 2 (Maximum 4 discounts at each location)

A proper test for methane and oxygen deficiency shall require the following action by the examiner:

METHANE - Detector shall be held at eye level or higher OXYGEN DEFICIENCY - Detector shall be held at waist level or below

The contestant will verbally identify each test to the judge(s).

7. Failure to determine correct section ventilation and proper direction of the ventilating current 10 (Each Location)

Failure to determine by air measurement the direction and volume of the ventilating air current. Failure to determine the correct direction of air current at regulators. Less than 9,000 cubic feet per minute (cfm) measured in the last open crosscut, or the intake end of a pillar line will be considered a hazard, unless otherwise stated in the written problem or other written instructions. Failure to assure section ventilation is maintained as required by the approved ventilation plan.

8. Improper procedure when taking an air measurement 2(Each Location)

Failure to traverse the entry/crosscut perpendicular to the ventilating current. Failure to measure the air current for 60-seconds.

Failure to measure height and width of area.

9. Not taking the required air measurement in the proper location prior to

stopping the clock. (regulation) 5

7

The person conducting the preshift examination shall determine the volume of air entering each of the following areas if anyone is scheduled to work in the areas during the oncoming shift:

A. In the last open crosscut of each set of entries or rooms on each working section and areas where mechanized mining equipment is being installed or removed. The last open crosscut is the crosscut in the line of pillars containing the permanent stoppings that separate the intake air courses and the return air courses.

B. On each longwall or shortwall in the intake entry or entries at the intake end of the longwall or shortwall face immediately outby the face and the velocity of air at each end of the face at the locations specified in the approved ventilation plan.

C. At the intake end of any pillar line –

1. If a single split of air is used, in the intake entry furthest from the return air course, immediately outby the first open crosscut outby the line of pillars being mined; or

2. If a split system is used, in the intake entries of each split immediately inby the split point.

10. Improper procedure when examining and testing the mine roof 2 (Each Location)

Failure to visually examine the mine roof. A discount will be assessed where the contestant fails to verbally state his/her visual examination of the mine roof at least one time in each entry.

11. Failure to identify verbally, placing a danger sign or correcting a hazardous condition 10 (Each Occurrence)

Discount will be assessed if contestant fails to identify hazardous conditions intended to be part of the problem.

12. Failure to correct hazardous conditions 10 each omission

Hazardous conditions must be corrected by the contestant during the examination when means or materials are available. However, preshift examiners are not required to install any roof support. If means or materials are not available, dangering off a hazardous condition will be considered acceptable corrective action.

13. Traveling at more than walking speed 5

Concurrence by two (2) judges required.

8

14. Contestants equipment not maintained in operable condition, each infraction 2

Would include cap lamp, methane detector/oxygen indicator and anemometer. Discount will be assessed if gas detection instrument fails during the working of the problem and no other instrument is provided. Concurrence by two (2) judges required.

15. Any act by the examiner, which may result in an explosion of an explosive air/gas mixture 30 (Each Occurrence)

A. Changing conditions of the ventilation in such a manner that an explosive mixture is moved over an ignition source.

B. Encountering an explosive air/gas mixture in a face, or other area, and failing to take proper corrective actions.

An explosive mixture will be present when the methane is between five and fifteen percent inclusively and the oxygen is 12.1 percent or greater. Both methane and oxygen concentrations will be shown on the placards.

16. Any act by the examiner, which may endanger himself/herself or others 20 (Each Occurrence)

A. Entering or remaining in an area known to contain an irrespirable atmosphere. Atmospheres containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen are irrespirable. Concentrations must be shown on the placard.

B. Encountering an adverse roof condition and failing to take adequate protective actions.

C. Traveling under unsupported or unsafe roof. (Self-explanatory.)

D. Traveling through water over knee deep. (For contest only)

E. Entering or remaining in smoke.

F. Crossing or working on belts in motion.

17. Contestant not following the written instructions for working the problem 15 (Each Occurrence)

18. Failure to examine all accessible areas that can be safely traveled 5 (Each location) (Maximum 20 points)

For contest purposes, “examine” means physical presence required.

19. Failure to comply with general rules not covered in the discount sheet 2

9

INTERPRETATION OF THE PRESHIFT RECORD 1. Preshift record page not legible 2

Discount assessed to each illegible article; two judges must concur, not to exceed 30.

2. Failure to record location of examination 2 (Each omission)

3. Failure to record hazardous conditions 2 (Each omission)

4. Failure to record action taken to correct hazardous conditions 2 (Each omission)

5. Failure to record date and time of examination 2

6. Failure to record results of air measurements 2 (Each omission)

7. Failure to record results of methane (CH4) examinations 2 (Each omission)

8. Failure to certify by signature 2

9. Failure to date entry of signature 2

10. If a contestant fails to take a gas test or air reading during the working of the problem and enters a reading in the preshift record 20 (Each occurrence)

10

STATEMENTS OF FACT

PRESHIFT CONTEST

1. A preshift examiner must be certified or registered in the State in which the coal mine is located. (Mine Act 1977, Sect. 318(a))

2. Preshift examinations must be conducted within 3 hours preceding the beginning of any 8-hour interval during which any person is scheduled to work or travel underground. (30 CFR 75.360(a)(1))

3. The lower explosive limit for methane is 5 volume percent. (MSHA3028 p.2-15, 2-47 & 2-55)

4. Air being used to ventilate areas where persons work or travel shall contain at least 19.5 percent oxygen. (30 CFR 75.321(a)(1))

5. Ventilation is utilized to dilute, render harmless and carry away flammable, explosive, noxious, and harmful gases, dusts, smoke, and fumes. (30 CFR 75.325, 330(b)(1))

6. When taking a reading with an anemometer, a commonly used method is to traverse the airway. (MSHA 3028 p. 3-17)

7. Low barometric pressures may cause methane to migrate outward from pillared areas into active workings. (MSHA 3028 p. 2-5)

8. About 21 percent of normal air is oxygen. (MSHA 3028 p. 2-13 & 2-51)

9. Where the mining height permits and the visual examination does not disclose a hazardous condition, sound and vibration tests, or other equivalent tests, shall be made where supports are to be installed. (30 CFR 75.211(b))

10. Methane is lighter than air. (MSHA 3028 p. 2-6 & 2-16)

11. To test for methane, use a methane detector or chemical analysis. (MSHA 3028 p, 2-16, 2-49 & 2-55)

12. Low voltage up to and including 660 volts, medium voltage 661 volts to 1,000 volts; and high voltage means more than 1,000 volts. (30 CFR 75.2 Definitions.)

13. The upper explosive limit for methane is 15 volume percent. (MSHA 3028 p. 2- 15, 2-47 & 2-55)

14. Methane detectors should be calibrated with a known methane-air mixture at least once every 31 days. (30 CFR 75.320 (a))

15. Each underground coal mine operator shall ensure that at least 2 miners in each working section on each production shift are proficient in the use of all fire suppression equipment available on such working section, and know the location of such fire suppression equipment. (30 CFR 75.1503(a))

16. Carbon monoxide has no taste or odor. (MSHA 3028 p. 3-8)

11

17. Tests for methane concentration should be made at least 12 inches from the roof, face, ribs, and floor. (30 CFR 75.323(a))

18. The end of permanent roof support shall be posted with a readily visible warning, or a physical barrier shall be installed to impede travel beyond permanent support. (30 CFR 75.208)

19. Roof support materials, sequence of roof support installation and spacing, are stated in the Approved Roof Control Plan. (30 CFR 75.221)

20. All electric face equipment taken into or used inby the last open crosscut shall be permissible. (30 CFR 75.503)

21. Escapeways shall be clearly marked to show the route and direction of travel to the surface. (30 CFR 75.380(d)(2))

22. No person other than certified examiners may enter or remain in any underground area unless a preshift examination has been completed for the established 8-hour interval. (30 CFR 75.360(a)(1))

23. Ventilation controls are used underground to properly distribute air to all sections of the mine. (MSHA 3028 p. 3-8)

24. Tests for oxygen deficiency shall be made by a qualified person with MSHA approved oxygen detectors maintained in permissible and proper operating condition. (30 CFR 75.320(b))

25. The maximum 8 hour exposure level for carbon monoxide is 50 ppm. (MSHA 3028 p. 2-9)

26. The minimum last open crosscut air requirements also applies to sections which are not operating but are capable of producing coal by simply energizing the equipment on the section. (30 CFR 75.325(b))

27. Lubricating oil and grease kept underground shall be stored in fireproof, closed metal containers. (30 CFR 75.1104)

28. The results of the preshift examination must be recorded in a book, provided for that purpose on the surface, before any persons other than the certified persons may enter any underground areas. (30 CFR 75.360(g))

29. All fire suppression devices shall be visually inspected at least once each week by a person qualified to make such inspections. (30 CFR 75.1107-16(a))

30. Preshift examinations are made by persons designated by the operator. (30 CFR 75.360(a)(1))

31. A bar for taking down loose material shall be available in the working place or on all face equipment except haulage equipment. (30 CFR 75.211(d))

32. The operator must establish 8-hour intervals of time subject to the required preshift examinations. (30 CFR 75.360(a)(1))

12

33. In exhausting face ventilation systems, a mean entry velocity of at least 60 feet per minute will reach each working face where coal is being cut mined or loaded. (30 CFR 75.326)

34. Test holes, spaced at intervals specified in the roof control plan, shall be drilled to a depth at least 12 inches above the anchorage horizon of mechanically anchored tensioned roof bolts being used. (30 CFR 75.204(f)(2))

35. Before implementing an approved revision to a roof control plan, all persons who are affected by the revision shall be instructed in its provisions. (30 CFR 75.220(d))

36. A minimum quantity of 3,000 cubic feet per minute shall reach each working face where coal is being cut, mined, drilled for blasting, or loaded. (30 CFR 75.325(a)(1))

37. Self-contained self-rescuers are used to protect the wearer from the effects of irrespirable atmosphere.

38. The quantity of air reaching the last open crosscut of each set of entries or rooms on each working section and the quantity of air reaching the intake end of a pillar line shall be at least 9,000 cubic feet per minute unless a greater quantity is required to be specified in the approved ventilation plan. (30 CFR 75.325(b))

39. Rock dust applications to the roof, ribs, and floor shall be maintained to within 40 feet of the working face, except in those areas where the dust is too wet or too high in incombustible content. (30 CFR 75.402)

40. The results of preshift examinations may be called out to a responsible person on the surface, or carried to the surface by the examiner. (30 CFR 75.360).

41. Oxygen detectors shall be calibrated at the start of each shift that the detectors will be used. (30 CFR 75.320(b))

42. Chemical extinguishers shall be examined every 6 months and the date of the examination shall be written on a permanent tag attached to the extinguisher. (30 CFR 75.1100-3)

43. Conveyor belts used to transport persons during the oncoming shift must be examined during the preshift examination. (30 CFR 75.360(b)(2))

44. High spots where methane is likely to accumulate, over haulageways where equipment will travel must be examined during the preshift examination. (30 CFR 75.360(b)(8))

45. Any area of the mine where a hazardous condition is observed shall be posted with a conspicuous danger sign where anyone entering the area would pass. (30 CFR 75.363(a))

46. Methane tests and the examiner’s certification with date, time and initials, shall be made at seals located along intake air courses that ventilate working sections where anyone is scheduled to work during the oncoming shift. (30 CFR 75.360)

13

47. A visual examination of the roof, face and ribs shall be made immediately before any work is started in an area and thereafter as conditions warrant. (30 CFR 75.211(a))

48. Low barometric pressures may cause seals to leak the sealed atmosphere outward into adjacent airways. (Miner’s Circular 36, Bureau of Mines, 1948)

49. Regulators are used in mine ventilation to regulate airflow to meet the individual needs of each air split. (MSHA 3028 p. 3-12)

50. A sightline or other method of directional control shall be used to maintain the projected direction of mining in entries, rooms, crosscuts and pillar splits. (30 CFR 75.203(b))

51. The operator must maintain a 300 foot diameter barrier around oil and gas wells, unless a lesser barrier consistent with State laws and regulations is approved. (30 CFR 75.1700)

52. Persons underground shall use only permissible electric lamps approved by MSHA. (30 CFR 75.1703)

53. A supply of first aid equipment shall be maintained in each working section not more than 500 feet outby the active working face or faces. (30 CFR 75.1713-7 (a) (3)

54. After each time a self-rescue device is worn or carried, the device shall be inspected for damage and for the integrity of its seal by a trained person. (30 CFR 1714-3(b)

55. If a mantrip or mobile equipment is used to enter or exit a mine it must have one additional, one hour SCSR, for each person who uses that transportation. (30 CFR 75. 1714-4(b)

56. Damaged rollers or other damaged belt conveyor components, which pose a fire hazard must be immediately repaired or replaced. (30 CFR 75.1731(a)

57. The mine emergency evacuation and firefighting program is required to instruct all miners in the use, care and maintenance of self-rescue devices. (30 CFR 75.1502(c)(2)

58. The mine emergency evacuation and firefighting program requires a review of the mine map, the escapeway system, and location of refuge alternatives. (30 CFR 75.1502(c)(8)

59. Prior to assuming duties on a section or outby work location, a foreman shall travel both escapeways in their entirety. (30 CFR 75.1504(a)(2)

60. Each quarterly evacuation training and drill shall include recognizing when the SCSR is not functioning properly and demonstrating how to initiate and reinitiate the starting sequence. (30 CFR 75.1504(b)(2)(i)

14

61. An escapeway map shall show the designated escapeway from the working section or the miner’s work station to the surface or the exits at the bottom of the shaft or slope, refuge alternatives, and SCSR storage locations. (30 CFR 75 1505(a)

62. The escapeway map shall be posted or readily accessible for all miners at the following locations; in the working section, where mechanized mining equipment is being installed or removed, at the refuge alternative and at a surface location of the mine where miners congregate. (30 CFR 75.1505(a)

63. Refuge alternatives shall be located within 1,000 feet from the nearest working face and from the locations where mechanized mining equipment is being installed or removed. (30 CFR 75.1506(c)(1)

64. At all times, the site and area around the refuge alternative shall be kept clear of machinery, materials and obstructions. (30 CFR 75.1506(g)

65. Telephones or equivalent two way communication facilities shall be located not more than 500 feet outby the last open crosscut and not more than 800 feet from the farthest point of penetration of the working places on a working section. (30 CFR 75.1600-2(a)

66. Belt conveyors that do not transport men should have start and stop controls installed at intervals not to exceed 1,000 feet. (30 CFR 75.1403-5(h)

67. Track haulage roads should have a continuous clearance on one side of at least 24 inches from the farthest projection of normal traffic. (30 CFR 75.1403-8(d)

68. The clearance space on all track haulage roads should be kept free of loose rock, supplies and other loose materials. (30 CFR 75.1403-8(d)

69. Off track haulage roadways should be maintained as free as practicable from bottom irregularities, debris, and wet or muddy conditions. (39 CFR 75.1403- 10(i)

70. Only permissible explosives, approved sheathed explosive units, and permissible blasting units shall be used underground. (30 CFR 75.1310(a)

71. All underground explosives magazines shall be located at least 25 feet from roadways and any source of electric current. (30 CFR 75.1312(e)(1)

72. The map required by 75.1200 shall be kept up to date by temporary notations. (30 CFR 75.1202)

73. Temporary notations shall include Permanent ventilation controls constructed or removed, such as seals, overcasts, undercasts, regulators, and permanent stoppings, and the direction of air currents. (30 CFR 75.1202-1(b)(3)

74. Main mine fans shall be equipped with an automatic device that gives a signal when the fan slows or stops. (30 CFR 75.310(a)(3)

15

75. Each main mine fan shall be examined for proper operation by a trained person designated by the operator once each day unless a fan monitoring system is used. (30 CFR 75.312(a)

76. The daily main mine fan examination is not required on any day when no one, including certified persons, goes underground. However, the main mine fan examination shall be completed prior to anyone entering the mine. (30 CFR 75.312(a))

77. Permissible flame safety lamps may only be used as a supplementary testing device. (30 CFR 75.320(d)

78. When 1 percent or more methane is present in a working place or intake air course, except for intrinsically safe atmospheric monitoring system (AMS), electrically powered equipment in the affected area shall be deenergized, other mechanized equipment shall be shut off. (30 CFR 75.323(a)(i)

79. When 1 percent or more methane is present in a working place or intake air course, changes or adjustments shall be made at once to the ventilation system to reduce the concentration of methane to less than 1 percent. (30 CFR 75.323(a)(ii)

80. When 1 percent or more methane is present in a working place or intake air course, no other work shall be permitted in the affected area until the methane concentration is less than 1 percent. (30 CFR 75.323(a)(iii)

81. When auxiliary fans and tubing are used for face ventilation, each auxiliary fan shall be deenergized or shut off when no one is present on the working section. (30CFR 75.331(a)(3)

82. When an auxiliary fan is stopped, line brattice or other face ventilation control devices shall be used to maintain ventilation to the working places. (30 CFR 75.331(d)

83. When two or more sets of mining equipment are simultaneously engaged in cutting, mining, or loading coal or rock from working places within the same working section, each set of mining equipment shall be on a separate split of intake air. (30 CFR 75.332(a)(2)

84. The atmosphere in the sealed area is considered inert when the oxygen concentration is less than 10 percent or the methane concentration is less than 3 percent or more than 20.0 percent. (30 CFR 75.336(b)(1)

85. Welding, cutting and soldering with an arc or flame are prohibited within 150 feet of a seal. (30 CFR 75.337(f)

86. The person conducting the preshift examination shall examine for hazardous conditions, test for methane and oxygen deficiencies, and determine if the air is moving in its proper direction. (30 CFR 75.360(b)

16

87. The last open crosscut is the crosscut in the line of pillars containing the permanent stoppings that separate the intake air courses and the return air courses. (30 CFR 75.360(c) (1)

88. The approved ventilation plan and any revisions shall be posted on the mine bulletin board within 1 working day following notification of approval. (30 CFR 75.370(f)(3)

89. The mine ventilation plan shall show the location where the air quantity ventilating the working place must be greater than 3,000 cubic feet per minute when coal is being cut, mined, drilled for blasting or loaded. (30 CFR 75. 371(g)

90. The mine ventilation plan shall show the quantity of air required in the last open crosscut if greater than 9,000 cubic feet per minute. ( 30 CFR 75.371(m)

91. The mine ventilation map shall show the direction of air flow in all underground areas of the mine. ( 30 CFR 75.372 (b)(9)

92. The mine ventilation map shall show the location of all escapeways and refuge alternatives. ( 30 CFR 75.372 (b)(11)

93. The directional lifeline shall be equipped with one directional indicator cone securely attached to the lifeline, signifying the route of escape, placed at intervals not exceeding 100 feet. (30 CFR 75.380(d)(7)(v)

94. The directional lifeline shall be equipped with two securely attached cones, installed consecutively with the tapered section pointing inby, to signify an attached branch line. ( 30 CFR 75.380(d)(7)(vii)

95. Boreholes shall be drilled in each working place when the working place approaches to within 200 feet of any mine workings of an adjacent mine located in the same coal bed unless the mine working have been preshifted. (30 CFR 75. 388(a) (3)

96. Where rock dust is to be applied it shall be maintained in such quantities that the incombustible content shall be not less than 80 per centum.

97. All electrical connections or splices shall be mechanically and electrically efficient and suitable connectors shall be used. (30 CFR 75.514)

98. Power wires and cables, except trolley wires and trolley feeder wires, and bare signal wires shall be insulated adequately and fully protected. (30 CFR 75.517)

99. All underground high-voltage transmission cables shall be guarded where men regularly work or pass under them unless they are 6 ½ feet or more above the floor or rail. ( 30 CFR 75.807)

100. Circuit breakers shall be marked for identification. (30 CFR 75.904)

1

2018 MINE RESCUE, FIRST AID, BENCH AND PRESHIFT RULES QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

Section I

Title Page

Mine Rescue .............................................................................................................................. 2

First Aid ..................................................................................................................................... 8

Preshift ..................................................................................................................................... 15

Skills ......................................................................................................................................... 15

2

MINE RESCUE Q&A

Q: Does time clock need shut off for problem to be considered completed?

A: Yes, if completed under the time limit, however once time limit is reached the problem is over.

Q: How many discounts if time runs out and judge shuts off time clock?

A: 15 points if the problem is not completed. 5 points if exploration is complete and the team is on its way out of the mine or in the FAB.

Q: Are gas tests required when a team makes the required 20 minute apparatus checks?

A: No.

Q: If the fan is off at the end of the problem is it required to state if it is blowing or exhausting?

A: Map must indicate changes to the fan and how the fan was left at the end of the problem. If the problem states that the fan can only be used one way (blowing or exhausting) then on and off will suffice if changed during the working of the problem.

Q: All placards that require an action in an intersection must be addressed prior to any team member breaking the imaginary rib line(s) of an opening off the intersection. What about a patient? Will they need to be treated and taken out before returning to the intersection to break the imaginary lines or can they be prepared to be taken out and then break the imaginary lines and do what we would normally do at the team stop?

A: Once the patient is passed off to a team member to complete the assessment then the captain can break the plane, once all placards requiring an action has been addressed in the intersection.

Q: Teams will not be required to perform roof and rib tests or take gas tests where a withdrawal situation is encountered. I think you mean exactly where the withdrawal is encountered but this could be argued that as the team retreats they do not have to perform roof and rib tests or gas tests.

A: On the retreat, roof and rib test or gas tests would be necessary at required locations, per rules.

3

Q: Will teams be discounted if they use the gas symbol at a seal sample pipe test?

A: Yes.

Q: If a barricade is put back up after patient is retrieved, is a roof and rib required?

A: No, only if barricade is moved.

Q: If a team passes by a fire that they have extinguished, on the way out, do they still have to do that roof test? Also if you changed vent do you have to take gas tests at the outby gas placards?

A: Yes, still have to comply with all of the rules.

Q: If a live patient is encountered in an intersection and the captain touches and D&I’s location and the #2 man does the assessment, can the captain continue on and explore while this is being completed?

A: Yes.

Q: Proper method of a roof test for a diagonal unsafe roof in an intersection, this situation requires a GT, DI at the unsafe. How do teams do this and comply with 23 and 29?

A: Captain makes the RR test and DI at the unsafe roof, anyone behind can take gas test.

Q: Are gas tests and RR tests required at outby locations on retreat out? Such as an extinguished fire in an intersection, or gas placards where constituents have changed that are enroute to the outside?

A: Yes.

Q: Is a gas test considered an action at a diagonal unsafe roof in an intersection. All actions talked about are captain actions. If you have a diagonal unsafe roof, water over knee deep, or caved required an action from the captain, it also requires a gas test which can be done by any other team member. Does this have to be done before breaking imaginary rib line?

A: Gas test required in an intersection must be taken before leaving the intersection but captain doesn’t have to be the one to take test.

Q: If you find a newly caved area retreating with patient and a gas test is taken and D&I caved area is this delay of patient?

A: If traveling out and the team encounters a newly caved area, to make sure it is safe for the team, then the team MUST make a RR and GT and DI the area. If the team does not encounter the newly caved area, the team does not have to go to the area

4

to conduct the tests.

Q: Do teams have to put unconscious person on CAREvent regardless of the atmosphere team is in or traveling through?

A: No, patient has to be on stretcher regardless and if found or taken into irrespirable atmospheres, the patient must be protected by an approved breathing apparatus or device with full face piece.

Q: After team signs off on contest packet after appeals, judges may grant or deny appeals but can discounts be added that were not previously on scorecard? If so the team would not have the opportunity to appeal this?

A: Discounts are not to be added to scorecards after team appeals, other than time discounts added after all teams completes the problem.

Q: Can the BO or CCA speak person to person, or do they have to use radios to communicate?

A: They can speak anyway (person to person or radios), just can’t compare maps.

Q: Will the contest director be available during team appeals for all teams to present their argument face to face along with writing their protest?

A: No.

Q: If team is discounted under an incorrect rule (mistake from the judges) and the team appeals the discount under the grounds that team did not commit said rule violation, should appeal judges grant the appeal or deny because if field judges on field?

A: Judges should ensure teams are discounted under the correct rule if a rule was broken, and scorecard examiners should ensure the scorecards are correct before team appeals. Discounts for field work are not to be added to scorecards after team appeals.

Q: If a gas is found behind a seal after taking a gas test at the sampling pipe will that be considered the contaminated entry?

A: Not if seal hasn’t been breached, problem designers should make it clear what the “Sealed areas” are.

Q: If no changes are made to the fan throughout the entire working of the problem, fan was left exactly how it was when the clock was started/stopped, would team still have to write on map how fan was left?

A: No.

5

Q: If elongated unsafe roof is encountered on the solid rib of an intersection, will the RR test still be required to be made before any team member leaves the intersection?

A: Yes, captain has to make the test in the intersection so no one can break the planes, until he completes the test for the area in the intersection.

Q: Is an overcast considered airtight ventilation structure?

A: Yes, unless otherwise told it is damaged or a door is open.

Q: Rule 23 does not say that a team member cannot be inby the captain in an intersection.

A: Rule 23 states “No team member may perform work or move into any area during a team stop until the captain makes the appropriate roof examination for that area. This would include either a sound and vibration method or a visual examination by the captain's physical presence.” This means no one can go inby a captain anywhere until the captain has been in that area first.

Q: If radios are already programmed before nationals will they still need to be turned in to be verified?

A: Yes, at the nationals they will be turned in to be checked for frequencies and PL codes.

Q: If statement says “Fan on – blowing” but nothing is indicated on team map when they receive it, is this information required on the map?

A: Team must denote changes to the fan.

Q: BG-4 apparatus battery warning is just a warning. Warning 1 – you have 4 hours. Warning 2 – you have 15 minutes. Need clarification.

A: If apparatus battery warning alarms, you must treat it as a malfunction and return to the FAB/surface.

Q: When mapping heavy smoke do you need an X or just the smoke symbol? Does the end of smoke require an X or just the symbol?

A: When mapping heavy smoke, draw the symbol on the map and write the word “Heavy” beside it. Teams are required to show the extent using the smoke symbol.

Q: Rule 29 change – An action in an intersection must be addressed prior to any team member breaking the imaginary rib lines. Rule 23 change seems to allow the team members to break the imaginary rib lines before the captain made necessary roof

6

and rib tests. These changes are in conflict.

A: The rules are not in conflict. No rule will require you to break another rule. Rule 29 requires teams to address all placards in the intersection before leaving the intersection. Rule 23 would require teams to make necessary roof and rib tests before leaving the intersection. Teams do not have to break the planes of the intersection when making the roof and rib tests, and should not until all placards requiring an action be addressed before doing so.

Q: Do the Q and A for 2016 or 2017 apply to the 2018 season?

A: No.

Q: What is the proper way to handle a placard in unsafe roof, caved areas, or water over knee deep?

A: If you mean what do you do if the placards are face down and the teams are required to turn them over, the captain should be sure not to pass them before turning them over. Teams should not be discounted for handling such placards to turn them over if they are found face down as long as the captain/team member does not pass them.

Q: Can a placard be placed under water over knee deep? If the placard is an explosive, will the gas be able to blow the mine up?

A: Problem designers should not put placards under water or caved areas.

Q: Rule 29 paragraph 3 – If there is an area of unsafe roof in an intersection with a live unconscious person under the unsafe roof and the team has multiple options by the rules to enter the intersection, would a problem designer be required to places means/materials to reach the person on both sides of the unsafe roof? Or could timbers be placed at only one location prior to advancing into the intersection where a team could retreat back into explored areas and retrieve those timbers before advancing into another intersection?

A: Problem designers should not design a problem that makes a team break a rule. Means or materials must be provided so teams can reach/address all placards that require an action before the team having to leave the intersection TO AN UNEXPLORED AREA. If the team passed timbers and had to go back to previously explored areas to get them, that is ok as long as the team does not go into an unexplored area before going back to the intersection in question.

Q: To comply with Rules 23 and 29, how is a team to perform roof tests on initial exploration at intersections with a “wrap-around” unsafe roof?

A: See Figure 1A in rules. Same as always. Team should not break the imaginary rib

7

line(s) until the entire area in the intersection has been tested.

Q: Rule 35 – If both sides of a barricade have been made and an irrespirable is in front of it, do you have to vent it out before taking the barricade down even though you have been on both sides.

A: No. The rule is referring to breaching the barricade if a team has not been on both sides.

Q: Rule 34 – do you have to put a CAREvent on an unconscious patient if you are not taking him through an irrespirable atmosphere?

A: No.

Q: If a team finds a patient in an intersection, does the patient have to be taken to the FAB before the captain explores the openings to that intersection?

A: No. The captain must first touch the patient, but then he can turn the patient over to other team members and explore all extents up to the limits allowed by Rule 29 before the team takes the patient to the FAB. (The team may choose to take the patient to the FAB before the captain completes the allowable exploration, but if it does, it must return to this stop and complete the exploration before going to another unexplored area.

8

FIRST AID Q&A

Q: General Rule: this rule states that to prepare for transport, patient will be secured to a backboard and lifted from the floor. The team is only required to have one backboard but can have up to three patients. Would a team be discounted for not placing a patient on a backboard if they do not have any spinal injuries or can walk?

A: Part of problem design should not discount team for not placing a patient on a backboard if one is not available. Problem designers should not design a problem with more than one patient requiring a stretcher.

Q: Rule 10, Mishandling of Patient: does this include rolling patient to the side that is injured or rolling a patient more than one time that has a spinal injury? Teams were discounted at the National Contest for rolling a patient more than once that had a spinal injury.

A: No. Mishandling of Patient (Rule 10) does not include the rolling of the patient to the side that is injured or rolling a patient more than one time that has signs/symptoms of spinal injury. Teams are required to roll the patient with the correct log roll procedures following the skill sheet for the log roll technique selected whether it is two or three person log roll.

Q: Score Card B, Rule 18: a ten-point discount for failure of tape to print results of AV and it is rule 17 for CPR. Is this a one-time discount or is it 10 points for AV and another 10 for CPR?

A: Yes, total 10-points otherwise it would be the 20 that it currently is for not performing CPR at all.

Q: AV Rule 2: is the discount 1 point per breath or 1 point for each set?

A: This is a timing discount: 1-point for each breath not within the 58-62 second time period.

Q: During CPR with AED, will the team complete four cycles of compressions and breaths and then apply the AED or complete 5?

A: The AED will be applied after the 5th cycle of compressions and 5th cycle of breaths.

Q: If it is applied during the 5th cycle, would only the first four cycles of compressions and breaths be judged on that portion of the tape, disregard the 5th cycle and judge the remaining cycles as outlined in the problem?

9

A: See answer to previous question.

Q: Does the AED have to be placed behind the base line prior to stopping the clock if used?

A: AED with all of its components will be placed behind the baseline.

Q: Please define what a factory tourniquet is. Those Velcro bands and latex blood draw bands cannot be effectively used to stop life threatening bleeding even though they are in a package that says tourniquet. I understand this is for contest purposes only but don’t think would should be training teams that this is acceptable.

A: Tourniquets will be considered a tourniquet if it meets the criteria in the Section 2, Item A and skill sheet is followed.

Q: Do any life-threating conditions on a patient dictate whether they are an immediate patient or is this only defined by the START Triage chart?

A: Triage is to be based on the chart taken from the 10th Edition Brady Text Chart Figure 27.5.

Q: Can a patient’s determination change during the working of the problem? For instance, can the patient go from a delayed to an immediate due to change in breathing, pulse or mental status?

A: Yes, but the team will be notified of the condition change as per the rules, which reads that injuries/conditions requiring treatment will be identified by cards, envelopes or labels attached to the patient at or as near the location of the injury as possible on the outside of the clothing, be identified by simulated wounds, or be in the reading of the problem.

Q: What amount of time will the time limits be if they are utilized?

A: After discussions with the committee, no less than 30-minutes for working the problem will be imposed.

Q: What docks will occur if a team meets the time limits if utilized?

A: Docks will be calculated based on what injuries or critical skills that the team failed to treat before the time ran out and put on the proper discount cards. If a team hasn’t started the treatment for a wound, it will be just like not treating the wound (not to exceed 20 docks). Those will be determined by the problem design.

10

Q: Life-threatening bleeding if stated or the team used the pressure points will the team be docked?

A: To save confusion and prevent controversy YES. If a team utilizes pressure point as a treatment the team will be docked under rule Scorecard A, Rule #10.

Q: When does the AED analyze, after the 5th cycle of compressions or 5th cycle of breaths?

A: The AED will analyze after the 5th cycle of two breaths are given.

Q: When does the team get the AED before starting CPR or during CPR?

A: This is addressed in the skill sheets for CPR Section (I), Item E it reads, “Get AED”.

Q: Discuss the timing of the envelopes being given to the teams.

A: This was discussed during the Problem Designers meeting. Prior to the 1st Aid Contest beginning, the Chief Judge or his/her assigned person(s) will go over the problem and discuss the timing of the envelopes to be given to the teams.

Q: In regards to burns to the eyes, if only one eye is burned is it required that the other eye be bandaged?

A: Yes, both eyes are to be bandaged (page 375 Chapter 19 and page 383 of the Brady Text 10th Edition).

Q: Shock treatment: do you have to check the blood pressure where it reads “check vital signs” or what is the intent of “check vital signs”?

A: Vital Signs in this case will mean check ABC: Airway (remains open), Breathing check- look, listen and feel for 5-10 seconds, and Circulation-a carotid artery check for pulse for 5-10 seconds. These steps can be conducted simultaneously.

Q: Will judges’ sheets be in the packets that the team receives during their protest time?

A: Yes the judges’ packets indicating what the team did not do as per the skill sheets will be in the packets for review to ensure that at least two judges concurred.

Q: Should Option 2—Lay the patient flat, face-up— still be an option for the treatment of shock?

A: This is in the skill sheet to keep the patient lying supine.

11

Q: Skill Sheet # 9 on page 27 the Procedure List states, “first rescuer applies the AED during the 5th cycle” but under Critical Skill Sheet it states “first rescuer continues compressions while second rescuer turns on AED and applies pads”. Which one is it?

A: Whether it indicates first or second rescuer as long as the team is following the skill sheet as CPR is to be performed it matters not. This should read simply “rescuer”.

Q: Support of fractures and/or dislocation shall not be broken or released except during the use of an AED when shock is delivered. Both “Two-Rescuer CPR with AED” (pages 24 and 27) state you must clear victim to analyze and to shock. Rule 23 does not cover when teams analyze victim. Does this cover both analyze and shock?

A: This covers when you analyze and shock.

Q: Regarding 3-person log roll, could you clarify what is to be verbalized in Item 4, Section A?

A: Page 38 First Aid Rules, what will be verbalized is, “On three, slowly roll. One, two, three roll together”.

Q: Regarding 3-person log roll, what is considered “Give instructions to bystander” if used to support?

A: “Physically Show” the bystander how to take support, inform on when and how long to take support.

Q: Regarding life-threatening bleeding, are direct pressure and tourniquet the only options for external bleeding?

A: Page 33, Item 1, Section C indicates to elevate the extremity except when spinal injury is present.

Q: If you have multiple teams in First Aid, can they share manikins and AEDs?

A: No. See page 5 Materials List

Q: In regards to burns, do we have to verbalize Item 3, Section B? If so, what part?

A: Verbalize the type of burn and percentage of burn to the body.

Q: Is First Aid Statement of Facts # 40 worded wrong? # 40 says, “During one-rescuer CPR on an adult, ventilations are delivered two: 30 breaths every compressions”. Shouldn’t it say, “Provide ventilations at a ratio of two breaths for every 30 compressions”?

12

A: The Statement of Fact needs corrected.

Q: Is the Brady book referred to “Emergency Medical Responder: First on Scene”, Edition 10?

A: Will send e-mail about the book.

Q: Should the AED be powered up?

A: The AED will not be powered up and can be a training model. A shockable rhythm or not will be determined by the envelopes given to the team.

Q: Does anyone have any recommendations for the printers for the new recording manikins? I know they are Bluetooth compatible. Does anyone have preferences of printers that work? Please send any recommendation to address: Johnhelmick@consolenergy.com

A: I have been told by other teams that use the “New” mannequins that the HP Office Jet 100 mobile printer will work and it is Bluetooth capable.

Q: CPR Spinal Injury Traction? Get AED, Maintain Support, Apply AED

A: If without a BYSTANDER- During two-person CPR with a problem that indicates a spinal injury the person will be required to utilize the modified jaw thrust maneuver. Getting the AED will be obtained while determining the level of responsiveness as in the skill sheets for CPR.

Q: How much lead time is needed to approve a problem?

A: Give as much time as possible but always send the problems in a PDF or readable format only. E-mailing the problems to (Sturgill.Vernus@dol.gov or Mullins.Vicki@dol.gov) two weeks prior for review and possible changes if required should give enough time.

Q: If I understand you correctly I do not have to open the package. So, if my patient’s entire chest and abdomen are burned, I do not have to open my burn sheet just place the wrapped package on the chest?

A: Page 5 Material List “for CONTEST PURPOSES ONLY” dressings need not be opened. No dock will occur if a team (or teams) decides to open them.

Q: I have a patient that is immediate and I have finished the examination, treated life threats, and prepared him for transportation. The judge tells me transportation is delayed. The rule says a detailed assessment would be required treating all wounds as found. A detailed assessment would entail saying all the verbalization as

13

described on the skill sheet. Is that what you want? When you were describing the rule, it sounded as you only wanted treatment. Please clarify this rule to the group.

A: Yes, teams will be required to verbalize a detailed assessment as per the skill sheets, until you are notified that transportation is available. Page 8, Transportation Delayed Immediate Patient, “After completing rapid assessment and treating life-threatening conditions, if transportation is delayed, patient treatment will continue until transportation is available. A detailed patient assessment would be required, treating conditions/injuries as found. Straps may be released as necessary. Support would have to be taken as required. Team will re-strap and transport when transportation is available or treatment completed. Patient is then prepared for transport and/or transported as required by written problem. To prepare for transportation, a team will be required to properly place and secure a patient on a backboard as outlined in the skill sheets, cover with a blanket and lift patient from the floor. After the patient has been lifted from the floor, the team will verbalize, “Transporting patient”.

Q: Can a team choose which log roll?

A: YES, it will be determined by whether you have a bystander since a team is made up of only two rescuers and a patient.

Q: For the three-person log roll, would this be used for someone found face down?

A: It can be for a patient who is found to be in the Supine position, Prone position, or Recovery (lateral recumbent) position.

Q: If not, why would the face be on the side?

A: See answer for previous question.

Q: Why would you assess the arms?

A: Section 2, Item C, states, “Assess the patient’s arms to ensure no obvious injuries”.

Q: What are the life threats that will be in “RED”?

A: Life-threatening conditions will be considered a patient having any one or more of the following conditions: breathing difficulties, no pulse, spinal injury, skull fracture, a sucking chest wound or life-threatening bleeding.

Q: Will the life threats if not attached to the patient, be in “RED” in the envelope when handed to the team(s)?

14

A: YES, but only life-threatening conditions.

Q: Do we keep patient positioned on the injured side unless other injuries prohibit?

A: Position of the patient during treatment and transportation shall be determined by the skill sheets of the injuries being treated, such as the skill sheet for treatment of a sucking chest wound “Keep patient positioned on the injured side unless other injuries prohibited”.

15

PRESHIFT Q&A Q: Should contestants get 20 minutes to review the field discounts and 20 minutes to review the preshift page discounts? (Doesn’t seem like enough time for both combined.) A: No, 20 minutes should be sufficient.

Skills Q&A

Q: Is the Mine Rescue Field problem working times by each team going to be averaged? If so will you get discounts if you are over the average working time?

A: Yes they will be averaged unless the problem has a time limit, which by rule the working time will only be used as a tie breaker. If the working times are averaged any team exceeding the average working time will be discounted on the Mine Rescue A-Time card accordingly

Q: On the Mine Rescue Field Problem during treatment of the Life Threatening Injury can the Tail Captain move?

A: Yes, if needed for assistance with the First Aid treatment ONLY

Q: Are Ribs, Roof and Floor Applicable for placement of placards and/or items?

A: Yes.

Q: Treatment for shock no longer calls for elevation. Can we get consistent with First Aid?

A: Yes, This will be addressed in the rules for 2019

Q: Why can teams not use calculators to calculate air flow and pressure readings? Everyone uses them to calculate air quantity:

A: Calculators cannot be used because they are not permissible or intrinsically safe. Also the purpose of not using a calculator is to teach the Math Skills of figuring out the correct amount of air quantity. There may be a time when a Team is asked to collect an air reading and they do not have a calculator with them so they need the skill of calculating it the formula way.

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Question:If captain takes roof

and rib test to the right (going toward #2), can the gas man go gas test

prior to captain finishing roof test inby

#1?

Answer: Team members

cannot go inby the captains location

prior to him making the proper roof test

for that area

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Team Travel

GT

GT

GT

GT

GT

GT

51

19.0

% CH4

PPM CO% O2

Answer:The gas entends from the placard

covering the entire unsafe area

Team Travel

Question:Where does

the gas extend to?

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Question:What would be the

correct way to timber to this temp in unsafe

roof?

Can you timber through with just 3

timbers?5'

B

Question:If both sides of a barricade

have been made and an irrespirable is infront of it, do you have to vent it out

before taking the barricade down even

though you have been on both sides?

3.155

18.1

% CH4

PPM CO% O2

Answer to both:The rules do not allow this, it should not be in

a problem design.

Answer:NO!

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Question:Will both sides still be

required to be airlocked?

D Team Travel

Airtight

Airtight

Answer:In this scenario, if

teams have found both airtight caved area, then the team can airlock as shown

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

54

19.0

% CH4

PPM CO% O2

Q6 – (R23) Can team see & map gas or

caved?

Team Travel

Team Travel

Q5 – Map entire unsafe

or just in intersection?

Battery Mine Phone

5.56

19.5

% CH4

PPM CO% O2

Inextinguishable Fire

Answer:Just in the intersection

up to the ignition source. FPA in 2 areas

and withdraw.

Answer:No--- problem

designers should design problems and

provide a means/materials to address all

placards that require an action in an

intersection

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Team Travel

Uncon.Live Person

Question:Please show proper procedure for this

situation to comply with rule 23, (No

team member may perform work…!)

Rule #32 / Rule #29

Answer:No team member can pass patient until the

captain touches patient. The team

cannot work on patient until captain makes roof and rib test at

least to patient location.

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Team Travel

Q1- Rule 23 & 29Does the team

map the person and inby side of the unsafe roof?

Answer:YES

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Team Travel

Q4- Rule 23 & 29Does the team

map BC and inby unsafes?

BC

Answer:Figure 2 B shows

proper way to travel through an unsafe

intersection.

Answer:If problem designers

put anything in an unsafe intersection,

you must give the team means and material to go all the way through.

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Team Travel

Question:How do teams

(captain) perform R&R test to comply with

Rule 23

Answer:Test all areas in the intersection before

breaching planes into unexplored areas

D

B

Question:If air is going through

door and over the overcast will it clear

the gas in front of the barricade? If “No”,

then how do you clear the gas?

Answer: Gas will NOT clear and

it cannot be winged out.

Open

B

Team Travel

Question:What would be the

procedure for checking this intersection?

Answer:Bad problem design.

Does not allow team to ensure area safe for

them.

Air

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Question:Is this a quiter?

Answer:If the smoke is found first, then Yes

If the explosive is found first, then No!

10.11

18.1

% CH4

PPM CO% O2

Face

Team Travel

Battery

Scenario #1

Question:Do you map the body

and the battery?

Is the intersection considered explored?

Answer:Yes

Yes

Scenario #2

Team Travel

Question:Do you map the body?

Is the intersection considered explored?

Answer:If the problem designer puts anything in unsafe intersection, they must give means and materials to go all the way through the intersection

Figure 2 B shows the proper way to travel through an unsafe intersection

Scenario #3

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Question:How can team safely

remove person without entering an area that is

outside of the timbered area?

How can you remove the person and not lift him over the timbers?

Answer:Conduct R&R test in intersection, then timber into the person before breaching planes into unexplored areas.

Team Travel

Scenario #1

Question:Does team map inby sides of unsafe roof?

Answer:Yes

Scenario #2

Team Travel

Question:Where are the required

gas test in the intersection?

Where is the gas extent?

Scenario #3

Team Travel Team Travel

Question:Does team map inby

side of caved?

Answer:No

GT

Answer:As shown for both

Person

Question:I have timbers, do I finish the R&R past plane lines before

dealing with person??

Answer:Timbers should be set as necessary up to 5' apart. 5' is more than enough room to recover patient

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Question:Can I touch person before setting 2nd

timber?

Answer:Team should make area safe. Timber should be set inby

patient, but to comply with all rules the

captain should not pass the patient while doing

so.

Question:What are the limits of

travel when team comes down shaft?

Answer: As shown

Scenario #2

Scenario #3

Team Travel

Face

Cut into old works

Cut into old works

Person

Timber 2

Timber 1

Team Travel

Shaft 1

Shaft 2

Question:Does cut into old works

stop travel?

Answer:No, however problem designers should not

require travel into old works.

Question:Are 2 gas test

requiredl?

Answer:Yes

Question:Does cut into old works

stop travel in this situation?

Answer:No, however problem designers should not

require travel into old works.

Shaft 3

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

A B C

Scenario #2

Scenario #3

DTeam Travel Closed

Question:If team cannot make both sides of the overcast, can you airlock through the

door?

Answer: Problem designers should NOT force teams to break a

rule.

Question:Show any possible air

movement?

Answer: As shown